Casio WK3000_3100_3500 WK3000 3100 3500 NL

User Manual: Casio WK3000_3100_3500 WK-3500 | Elektronische muziekinstrumenten | Handleidingen | CASIO

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 148 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

WK3000/3500-E-1

USER’S GUIDE

WK3000_e_cover.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM1

735A-E-002A

GUIDELINES LAID DOWN BY FCC RULES FOR USE OF THE UNIT IN THE U.S.A. (not applicable to other areas).

NOTICE

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15

of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,

there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful

interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user

is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

Important!

Please note the following important information before using this product.

• Before using the optional AD-12 Adaptor to power the unit, be sure to check the AC Adaptor for

any damage first. Carefully check the power cord for breakage, cuts, exposed wire and other serious

damage. Never let children use an AC adaptor that is seriously damaged.

• Never attempt to recharge batteries.

• Do not use rechargeable batteries.

• Never mix old batteries with new ones.

• Use recommended batteries or equivalent types.

• Always make sure that positive (+) and negative (–) poles are facing correctly as indicated near the

battery compartment.

• Replace batteries as soon as possible after any sign they are getting weak.

• Do not short-circuit the battery terminals.

• The product is not intended for children under 3 years.

• Use only CASIO AD-12 adaptor.

• The AC adaptor is not a toy.

• Be sure to disconnect the AC adaptor before cleaning the product.

CASIO ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.

Unit 6, 1000

North Circular Road

London NW2 7JD, U.K.

This mark is valid in the EU countries only.

Please keep all information for future reference.

WK3000_e_00.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM2

E-1

Safety Precautions

Congratulations on your selection of the CASIO

electronic musical instrument.

•Before using the instrument, be sure to carefully

read through the instructions contained in this

manual.

•Please keep all information for future reference.

Symbols

Various symbols are used in this user’s guide and on

the product itself to ensure that the product is used

safely and correctly, and to prevent injury to the user

and other persons as well as damage to property.

Those symbols along with their meanings are shown

below.

DANGER

This symbol indicates information that, if ignored

or applied incorrectly, creates the danger of death

or serious personal injury.

WARNING

This indication stipulates matters that have the risk

of causing death or serious injury if the product is

operated incorrectly while ignoring this indication.

CAUTION

This indication stipulates matters that have the risk

of causing injury as well as matters for which there

is the likelihood of occurrence of physical damage

only if the product is operated incorrectly while

ignoring this indication.

735A-E-003A

Symbol Examples

This triangle symbol ( ) means that the

user should be careful. (The example at

left indicates electrical shock caution.)

This circle with a line through it ( )

means that the indicated action must not

be performed. Indications within or

nearby this symbol are specifically

prohibited. (The example at left indicates

that disassembly is prohibited.)

The black dot ( ) means that the

indicated action must be performed.

Indications within this symbol are actions

that are specifically instructed to be

performed. (The example at left indicates

that the power plug must be unplugged

from the electrical socket.)

WK3000_e_01-09.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM1

E-2

735A-E-004A

Safety Precautions

Batteries

Misuse of batteries can cause them to leak,

resulting in damage to nearby objects, or to

explode, creating the risk of fire and

personal injury. Always make sure you

observe the following precautions.

•Never try to take batteries apart or allow

them to become shorted.

•Never expose batteries to heat or dispose

of them by incineration.

•Never mix old batteries with new ones.

•Never mix batteries of different types.

•Do not charge the batteries.

•Make sure the positive (+) and negative

(–) ends of the batteries are facing

correctly.

Do not incinerate the product.

Never throw the product into fire.

Doing so can cause it to explode, creating

the risk of fire and personal injury.

Water and Foreign Matter

Water, other liquids, and foreign matter

(such as pieces of metal) getting into the

product create the risk of fire and electric

shock. Take the following steps

immediately.

1. Turn off power.

2. If you are using the AC adaptor for

power, unplug it from the wall outlet.

3. Contact your original retailer or an

authorized CASIO Service Provider.

Disassembly and Modification

Never try to take this product apart or

modify it in any way. Doing so creates the

risk of electric shock, burn injury, or other

personal injury. Leave all internal

inspection, adjustment, and maintenance up

to your original retailer or authorized

CASIO Service Provider.

Dropping and Impact

Continued use of this product after it has

been damaged by dropping or subjecting it

to strong impact creates the risk of fire and

electric shock. Take the following steps

immediately.

1. Turn off power.

2. If you are using the AC adaptor for

power, unplug it from the wall outlet.

3. Contact your original retailer or an

authorized CASIO Service Provider.

DANGER

Alkaline Batteries

Perform the following steps immediately if

fluid leaking from alkaline batteries ever

gets into your eyes.

1. Do not rub your eyes! Rinse them with

water.

2. Contact your physician immediately.

Leaving alkaline battery fluid in your eyes

can lead to loss of sight.

WARNING

Smoke, Strange Odor, Overheating

Continued use of the product while it is

emitting smoke, a strange odor, or heat

creates the risk of fire and electric shock.

Take the following steps immediately.

1. Turn off power.

2. If you are using the AC adaptor for

power, unplug it from the wall outlet.

3. Contact your original retailer or an

authorized CASIO Service Provider.

AC Adaptor

Misuse of the AC adaptor creates the risk

of fire and electric shock. Always make sure

you observe the following precautions.

•Be sure to use only the AC adaptor that

is specified for this product.

•Use only a power source whose voltage

is the within the rating marked on the

AC adaptor.

•Do not overload electrical outlets and

extension cords.

AC Adaptor

Misuse of the AC adaptor’s electric cord

can damage or break it, creating the risk of

fire and electric shock. Always make sure

you observe the following precautions.

•Never place heavy objects on the cord or

subject it to heat.

•Never try to modify the cord or subject it

to excessive bending.

•Never twist or stretch the cord.

•Should the electric cord or plug become

damaged, contact your original retailer

or authorized CASIO Service Provider.

AC Adaptor

Never touch the AC adapter while your

hands are wet.

Doing so creates the risk of electric shock.

WK3000_e_01-09.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM2

E-3

Safety Precautions

CAUTION

AC Adaptor

Misuse of the AC adaptor creates the risk

of fire and electric shock. Always make sure

you observe the following precautions.

•Do not locate the electric cord near a

stove or other sources of heat.

•Never pull on the cord when unplugging

from the electrical outlet. Always grasp

the AC adaptor when unplugging.

AC Adaptor

Misuse of the AC adaptor creates the risk

of fire and electric shock. Always make sure

you observe the following precautions.

•Insert the AC adaptor into the wall outlet

as far as it will go.

•Unplug the AC adaptor from the wall

outlet during lightening storms or before

leaving on a trip or other long-term

absence.

•At least once a year, unplug the AC

Adaptor from the wall outlet and wipe

away any dust that is built up in the area

around the prongs of the plug.

Relocating the Product

Before relocating the product, always

unplug the AC adaptor from the wall outlet

and disconnect all other cables and

connecting cords. Leaving cords connected

creates the risk of damage to the cords, fire,

and electric shock.

Cleaning

Before cleaning the product, always unplug

the AC adaptor from the wall outlet first.

Leaving the AC adaptor plugged in creates

the risk of damage to the AC adaptor, fire,

and electric shock.

Batteries

Misuse of batteries can cause them to leak

resulting in damage to nearby objects, or to

explode, creating the risk of fire and

personal injury. Always make sure you

observe the following precautions.

•Use only batteries that are specified for

use with this product.

•Remove batteries from the product if you

do not plan to use it for a long time.

Connectors

Connect only the specified devices and

equipment to the product’s connectors.

Connection of a non-specified device or

equipment creates the risk of fire and

electric shock.

735A-E-005A

Plastic Bags

Never place the plastic bag the product

comes in over your head or in your mouth.

Doing so creates the risk of suffocation.

Particular care concerning this precaution

is required where small children are

present.

Keep off of the product and stand.*

Climbing onto the product or stand can

cause it to tip over or become damaged.

Particular care concerning this precaution

is required where small children are

present.

Location

Avoid locating the product on an unstable

stand, on an uneven surface, or any other

unstable location. An unstable location can

cause the product to fall over, creating the

risk of personal injury.

WK3000_e_01-09.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM3

E-4

735A-E-006A

Safety Precautions

Location

Avoid the following locations for this

product. Such locations create the risk of

fire and electric shock.

•Areas subject to high humidity or large

amounts of dust

•In food preparation areas or other areas

subject to oil smoke

•Near air conditioning equipment, on a

heated carpet, in areas exposed to direct

sunlight, inside of a vehicle parked in

the sun, or any other area that subjects

the product to high temperatures

Display Screen

•Never push on the display screen’s LCD

panel or subject it to strong impact. Doing

so can cause the LCD panel’s glass to

crack, creating the risk of personal injury.

•Should the LCD panel ever crack or

break, never touch the liquid inside of

the panel. LCD panel liquid can cause

skin irritation.

•Should LCD panel liquid ever get inside

your mouth, immediately wash out your

mouth with water and contact your

physician.

•Should LCD panel liquid ever get into

your eyes or onto your skin, rinse with

clear water for at least 15 minutes, and

then contact a physician.

Sound Volume

Do not listen to music at very loud volumes

for long periods. Particular care concerning

this precaution is required when using

headphones. High volume settings can

damage your hearing.

Heavy Objects

Never place heavy object on top of the

product.

Doing so can make the product top heavy,

causing the product to tip over or the object

to fall from it, creating the risk of personal

injury.

Correct Stand* Assembly

An incorrectly assembled stand can tip over,

causing the product to fall and creating the

risk of personal injury.

Make sure you assemble the stand correctly,

following the assembly instructions that

come with it. Make sure you mount the

product on the stand correctly.

*Stand is available as an option.

IMPORTANT!

When using batteries, be sure to replace them or shift to

one of the alternate power sources whenever you notice

any of the following symptoms.

• Dim power indicator

• Instrument does not turn on

• Display that is flickering, dim, or difficult to read

• Abnormally low speaker/headphone volume

• Distortion of sound output

• Occasional interruption of sound when playing at high

volumes

• Sudden power failure when playing at high volumes

• Flickering or dimming of the display when playing at high

volume

• Continued sound output even after you release a key

• A tone that is totally different from the one that is selected

• Abnormal rhythm pattern and demo tune play

• Loss of power, sound distortion, or low volume when

playing from a connected computer or MIDI device

• Sudden power failure while reading from or writing to a

diskette (WK-3500 only)

WK3000_e_01-09.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM4

E-5

735A-E-007B

Congratulations upon your selection of this CASIO musical instrument. This keyboard provides you with the following features

and functions.

❐516 Tones Include Rich Advanced Tones

A total of 300 Advanced Tones are programmed with DSP tones to make them richer and more powerful. Advanced tones like

Stereo Piano and Tremolo Electric Piano enhance the Piano and Electric Piano tones to create a totally new sound.

❐50 Drawbar Organ Tones

In addition to the 516 standards tones, the keyboard also includes 50 realistic drawbar organ tones. Drawbar organ tones can be

controlled using nine digital drawbars. You can also select percussion or key click, and even edit the parameters of preset tone

and save up to 100 original tones in user tone memory.

❐Flash Memory

Built-in Flash memory lets you expand your selection of tones and rhythms by downloading data from the CASIO MUSIC SITE,

or from other sources. You can also store up to 200 SMF format music files for playback.

❐PIANO SETTING Button

The press of a button optimizes the keyboard setup for piano play.

❐140 Preset Rhythms + 16 User Rhythms

A selection of 140 rhythms includes accompaniments for everything from rock to pops and jazz.

You can also transfer accompaniment data from your computer and store up to 16 of them as user rhythms in keyboard memory.

❐Auto Accompaniment

Simply play a chord and the corresponding rhythm, bass and chord parts play automatically. One-touch Preset instantly recalls

the most suitable tone and tempo settings to match the rhythm you are using.

❐Big, Information-packed Display

A big built-in display shows chord names, tempo setting, keyboard information, staff notation of notes played, and more for full

support of all your keyboard play. A built-in backlight keeps the display easy to read, even in total darkness.

❐Song Memory

Record up to six parts in memory, along with their tone, volume, pan position, and other parameters for later playback. Realistic

ensemble play can also be created using the Auto Accompaniment function.

❐Synthesizer Mode

Edit built-in sounds to produce your own original creations. Up to 120 of your own sounds can be stored in memory for recall,

just like the built-in tones.

❐General MIDI compatibility

The General MIDI tones of this keyboard let you connect to a personal computer to enjoy “desktop music” capabilities. This

keyboard can be used as a desktop music input device or sound source, and it's just the thing for playback of commercially

available pre-recorded General MIDI music software.

❐Powerful effects

A collection of powerful effects, such as DSP reverb, chorus, and more, give you total control over the type of sound you want.

You can even change the parameters of an effect to create your own, original effects. A 4-band equalizer is also included.

Introduction

WK3000_e_01-09.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM5

E-6

❐Mixer

You can specify tone, volume, pan position, and other parameters for each built-in Auto Accompaniment part. You can also

control the same parameters for each channel during MIDI input.

❐Registration Memory

Keyboard setups can be stored in memory for later recall and instant settings whenever you need them. Up to 32 setups (4 setups

x 8 banks) can be stored in registration memory.

❐Data download from your computer

You can use your computer to download data from the CASIO MUSIC SITE.

❐SmartMediaTM Card Slot

A built-in SmartMedia card slot helps to simplify transfer of data from a computer and lets you store volumes of data for later

recall when you need it. You can also load a card with a standard MIDI file (SMF) and play it back on the keyboard.

❐Built-in floppy disk drive (WK-3500 only)

Save original tones or songs you created with the Song Memory to disk for long-term storage. You can also load a disk with a

standard MIDI file (SMF) and play it back on the keyboard.

Introduction

735A-E-008A

WK3000_e_01-09.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM6

E-7

735A-E-009A

Contents

Safety Precautions ................E-1

Introduction ...........................E-5

Contents.................................E-7

General Guide......................E-10

Attaching the Score Stand ..................... E-11

Playing a Demo Tune .............................E-12

About the display ...................................E-14

Power Supply ......................E-16

Using batteries .......................................E-16

Using the AC Adaptor .............................E-17

Auto Power Off .......................................E-17

Turning Off the Keyboard ....................... E-18

Memory Contents ...................................E-18

Connections ........................E-19

Basic Operations.................E-22

To play the keyboard .............................. E-22

Selecting a Tone.....................................E-22

PIANO SETTING Button ........................ E-24

Using the PITCH BEND Wheel .............. E-25

Using the MODULATION .......................E-25

Using the Drawbar Organ

Mode .....................................E-26

To select a drawbar organ tone ..............E-28

To edit a drawbar organ tone ................. E-28

Parameter Details ..................................E-29

To save an edited drawbar organ tone ... E-30

Applying Effects to

Tones ....................................E-31

Effect Blocks ..........................................E-31

Selecting a DSP Type ............................ E-32

About the DSP Button ............................ E-34

Selecting REVERB ................................ E-34

Selecting CHORUS ................................E-36

Using the Equalizer ................................ E-37

Auto Accompaniment ......... E-38

About the MODE Button ........................E-38

Selecting a Rhythm ................................ E-39

Playing a Rhythm ................................... E-39

Adjusting the Tempo...............................E-39

Using Auto Accompaniment ................... E-40

Using an Intro Pattern ............................ E-43

Using a Fill-in Pattern .............................E-43

Using a Rhythm Variation....................... E-43

Synchro Starting Accompaniment

with Rhythm Play ...................................E-44

Finishing with an Ending Pattern ........... E-44

Using One-touch Preset .........................E-45

WK3000_e_01-09.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM7

E-8

735A-E-010A

Contents

Using Auto Harmonize ........................... E-45

Adjusting the Accompaniment Volume ... E-46

Mixer Function.....................E-47

What you can do with the Mixer .............E-47

Turning Channels On and Off ................ E-47

Using the Parameter Edit Mode .............E-48

How Parameters Work ...........................E-49

Synthesizer Mode................E-51

Synthesizer Mode Functions ..................E-51

Creating a User Tone .............................E-54

Storing a User Tone In Memory ............. E-57

Registration Memory ..........E-59

Registration Memory Features ...............E-59

To Save a Setup in Registration

Memory ..................................................E-60

To Recall a Setup from Registration

Memory ..................................................E-60

Song Memory Function ......E-61

Tracks .................................................... E-61

Basic Song Memory operations .............E-61

Using Real-time Recording ....................E-62

Mixer Mode Settings ..............................E-63

Playing Back from Song Memory ...........E-64

Recording Melody and Chords

with Step Recording ...............................E-64

Recording Multiple Tracks ...................... E-67

Correcting Mistakes While Step

Recording ............................................... E-69

Editing Memory Contents .......................E-70

Editing a Song ........................................E-72

Keyboard Settings ..............E-74

Using Layer ............................................ E-74

Using Split .............................................. E-75

Using Layer and Split Together ..............E-76

Transposing the Keyboard .....................E-77

Using Touch Response .......................... E-78

Tuning the Keyboard .............................. E-78

Changing Other Settings ........................E-79

Using the SMF Player .........E-84

Playing Back an SMF .............................E-86

Configuring Other Settings .....................E-87

MIDI.......................................E-89

What is MIDI? ........................................ E-89

General MIDI ..........................................E-89

Sending and Receiving MIDI

Messages ............................................... E-90

MIDI Settings .........................................E-90

Using the Data Download Service ......... E-91

Saving Data..........................E-92

Using a SmartMedia Card ......................E-93

Using the Floppy Disk Drive

(WK-3500 Only) .....................................E-94

WK3000_e_01-09.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM8

E-9

Contents

735A-E-011A

Company and product names used in this

manual may be registered trademarks of

others.

Using External Storage Media ............... E-96

Saving Files ...........................................E-98

Loading a File ........................................E-99

Renaming a File ...................................E-100

Deleting a File ......................................E-101

Formatting External Storage Media ..... E-102

Inputting Characters .............................E-103

SmartMedia Card Error Messages ......E-104

Disk Drive Error Messages

(WK-3500 Only) ...................................E-105

Troubleshooting ................ E-106

Specifications ....................E-109

Care of your Instrument ... E-112

Appendix ............................... A-1

Tone List ...................................................A-1

Drum Assignment List ............................A-12

Rhythm List ............................................A-14

Fingered Chord Chart ............................ A-15

Effect List ............................................... A-17

DSP Algorithm List .................................A-19

MIDI Implementation Chart

WK3000_e_01-09.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM9

E-10

735A-E-012A

General Guide

8 C0 K L

A B I

*3SR U

1 2 73 654

FD G HE

M M

*2QN O P *1

V W X

Y Z [ \ ] a b

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM10

E-11

General Guide

735A-E-013A

•Illustrations in this User’s Guide shows the WK-3500.

1POWER button

2Power indicator

3MODE button

4EFFECT button

5SYNTH button

6MIXER button

7TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button

8VOLUME knob

9ONE TOUCH PRESET button

0ACCOMP VOLUME button

ASONG MEMORY button

B쎲WK-3500

DISK/CARD button

쎲WK-3000

CARD button

CDATA ACCESS lamp

DRHYTHM button

ETONE button

FDSP button

GPIANO SETTING button

H[왖]/[왔]/[왗]/[왘] CURSOR button

IEXIT button

JAUTO HARMONIZE button

KSPLIT button

LLAYER button

MSpeaker

NRhythm list

OTone list

PDisplay

QDEMO button*4

R쎲WK-3500

PHONES terminal

쎲WK-3000

PHONES/OUTPUT terminal

SCHORD root names

TPercussion instrument list

UChord types name

VSMF PLAYER button

WCHANNEL button(1~16, DSP)/drawbar buttons

XDRAWBAR ORGAN button

YINTRO/ENDING 1/2 buttons

ZVARIATION/FILL-IN 1/2 buttons

[SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button

\START/STOP button

]TEMPO buttons

_SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons

a) BANK button

b) REGISTRATION buttons

c) STORE button

Attaching the Score Stand*1

Insert the score stand into the slot at the top

of the keyboard as shown in the illustration.

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM11

E-12

aNumber buttons

b[+]/[–] buttons

(YES/NO)

•For input of numbers to

change displayed settings.

•Negative values can be

changed only by using [+]

and [–] to increment and

decrement the displayed

value.

Playing a Demo Tune*4

Pressing the DEMO button starts demo tune play. There are 3 demo tunes, which continuously play in sequence. To stop demo

tune play, press either the DEMO button or the START/STOP button.

NOTE

•Pressing the [+]/[–] buttons skips to the next demo tune.

•The PIANO SETTING button, Layer, and Split are disabled while a demo tune is playing.

General Guide

735A-E-014A

• WK-3500

cPITCH BEND wheel

dMODULATION wheel

• WK-3000

cMODULATION button

dMODULATION button lamp

ePITCH BEND wheel

c d

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM12

E-13

Rear Panel

• WK-3500

hMIDI OUT terminal

iMIDI IN terminal

jSUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK terminal

kLINE OUT R, LINE OUT L/MONO terminal

lDC 12V terminal

OUT IN

SUSTAIN/

ASSIGNABLE JACK

MIDI

DC 12V

h i j k

OUT IN

SUSTAIN/

ASSIGNABLE JACK

MIDI

LINE OUT

R L/MONO

DC 12V

h i j k l

• WK-3000

hMIDI OUT terminal

iMIDI IN terminal

jSUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK terminal

kDC 12V terminal

Front Panel

• WK-3500 only

fAccess lamp

gEject button

Rear Panel

mCard slot

General Guide

735A-E-015A

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM13

E-14

General Guide

735A-E-016A

About the display

TONE/RHYTHM indicator

TONE is shown during tone selection and display, while RHYTHM is shown during rhythm selection and display.

Tone/Rhythm number (number area)

Number of currently selected tone or rhythm. The TONE/RHYTHM indicator shows whether the number is a tone or rhythm.

This area also shows other information in other modes.

Chord name display

Shows chord names while Auto Accompaniment is being used.

Tone/Rhythm name (text area)

Name of currently selected tone or rhythm. The TONE/RHYTHM indicator shows whether the name is a tone or rhythm. This

area also shows other information in other modes.

Octave symbol 1

One symbol indicates the note being produced by the keyboard is one octave higher than the note shown in the staff notation

area

. Two symbols indicate two octaves higher.

Staff notation area

Notes you play on the keyboard, notes played back from song memory, chord forms, and received MIDI data* are shown

here.

Octave symbol 2

One symbol indicates the note being produced by the keyboard is one octave lower than the note shown in the staff notation

area

Indicators

An indicator appears to indicate that a function (Song Memory, SMF player, Auto Harmonize, Split, Layer) is currently in use.

Beat number

Shows the beat number during rhythm and Auto Accompaniment play, and while the Song Memory and SMF Player are

turned on.

10.

Measure

Shows the measure number from the start of play during rhythm and Auto Accompaniment play, and while the Song Memory

and SMF Player are turned on.

11.

Tempo indicator

Shows the tempo as a value indicating the number of beats per minute during rhythm and Auto Accompaniment play, and

while the Song Memory is turned on. This display area also shows other information in other modes.

12.

Metronome

You can turn on the metronome to provide a reference beat for your keyboard play.

Gr an ndP o

543

8 7

121314 11 610 9

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM14

E-15

13.

Level meter

The numbers 1 through 16 correspond to Mixer channels. The level meter indicates which channels are on and off, and also

indicates the volume level.

Drawbar Organ Mode

In the Drawbar Organ Editing Mode, the level meter shows the position of each drawbar and the status of each percussion

parameter.

14.

Graphic keyboard

Notes you play on the keyboard, notes played back from song memory, and received MIDI data* are indicated on the graphic

keyboard.

15.

Mode indicators

Pointers appear next to these mode names to indicate that the Transpose, Keyboard Settings, Mixer, Synth, Effect, or Disk/

Card mode is currently active.

* Any receive data outside the range of E1 to G7 is not displayed.

NOTE

•Display examples shown in this User’s Guide are intended for illustrative purposes only. The actual text and values that

appear on the display may differ from the examples shown in this User’s Guide.

•Due to LCD element characteristics, display contrast changes depending on the angle from which you view it. The initial

default contrast setting is one that allows easy viewing for a musician seated directly in front of the display. You can also

adjust the contrast to the level that suits your particular needs. For more information, see page E-82.

General Guide

735A-E-017A

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM15

E-16

This keyboard can be powered by current from a standard

household wall outlet (using the specified AC adaptor) or by

batteries. Always make sure you turn the keyboard off

whenever you are not using it.

Using batteries

Always make sure you turn off the keyboard before loading

or replacing batteries.

To load batteries

Remove the battery compartment cover.

Load six D-size batteries into the battery

compartment.

•Make sure that the positive (+) and negative (–) ends

are facing correctly.

Insert the tabs on the battery compartment cover

into the holes provided and close the cover.

NOTE

•The keyboard may not function correctly if you load or

replace batteries with power turned on. If this happens,

turning the keyboard off and then back on again should

return functions back to normal.

Power Supply

tab

Important Battery Information

■

The following shows the approximate battery life.

Alkaline batteries ............................. 4 hours

The above value is standard battery life at normal

temperature, with the keyboard volume at a medium

setting. Temperature extremes or playing at very loud

volume settings can shorten battery life.

■

Any of the following symptoms indicate low battery power.

Replace batteries as soon as possible whenever any of

the following occurs.

•Dim power indicator

•Instrument does not turn on

•Display that is flickering, dim, or difficult to read

•Abnormally low speaker/headphone volume

•Distortion of sound output

•Occasional interruption of sound when playing at high

volumes

•Sudden power failure when playing at high volumes

•Flickering or dimming of the display when playing at

high volume

•Continued sound output even after you release a key

•A tone that is totally different from the one that is

selected

•Abnormal rhythm pattern and demo tune play

•Loss of power, sound distortion, or low volume when

playing from a connected computer or MIDI device

•Sudden power failure while reading from or writing to

a diskette (WK-3500 only)

WARNING

Misuse of batteries can cause them to leak, resulting in

damage to nearby objects, or to explode, creating the risk of

fire and personal injury. Always make sure you observe the

following precautions.

•Never try to take batteries apart or allow them to

become shorted.

•Never expose batteries to heat or dispose of them by

incineration.

•Never mix old batteries with new ones.

•Never mix batteries of different types.

•Do not charge the batteries.

•Make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) ends of

the batteries are facing correctly.

CAUTION

Misuse of batteries can cause them to leak resulting in

damage to nearby objects, or to explode, creating the risk of

fire and personal injury. Always make sure you observe the

following precautions.

•Use only batteries that are specified for use with this

product.

•Remove batteries from the product if you do not plan

to use it for a long time.

735A-E-018A

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM16

E-17

Using the AC Adaptor

Make sure that you use only the AC adaptor specified for

this keyboard.

Specified AC Adaptor: AD-12

Also note the following important warnings and precautions

when using the AC adaptor.

WARNING

Misuse of the AC adaptor creates the risk of fire and electric

shock. Always make sure you observe the following

precautions.

•Be sure to use only the AC adaptor that is specified

for this product.

•Use only a power source whose voltage is within the

rating marked on the AC adaptor.

•Do not overload electrical outlets and extension cords.

•Never place heavy objects on the cord or subject it to

heat.

•Never try to modify the cord or subject it to excessive

bending.

•Never twist or stretch the cord.

•Should the electric cord or plug become damaged,

contact your original retailer or authorized CASIO

Service Provider.

•Never touch the AC adaptor while your hands are wet.

Doing so creates the risk of electric shock.

Power Supply

CAUTION

Misuse of the AC adaptor creates the risk of fire and electric

shock. Always make sure you observe the following

precautions.

•Do not locate the electric cord near a stove or other

sources of heat.

•Never pull on the cord when unplugging from the

electrical outlet. Always grasp the AC adaptor when

unplugging.

•Insert the AC adaptor into the wall outlet as far as it

will go.

•Unplug the AC adaptor from the wall outlet during

lightening storms or before leaving on a trip or other

long-term absence.

•At least once a year, unplug the AC adaptor from the

wall outlet and wipe away any dust that is built up in

the area around the prongs of the plug.

IMPORTANT!

•Make sure that the keyboard is turned off before

connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor.

•Using the AC adaptor for a long time can cause it to

become warm to the touch. This is normal and does not

indicate malfunction.

Auto Power Off

When you are using battery power, keyboard power turns

off automatically whenever you leave it on without

performing any operation for about 6 minutes. When this

happens, press the POWER button to turn power back on.

NOTE

•Auto Power Off is disabled (it does not function) when

you are using the AC adaptor to power the keyboard.

To disable Auto Power Off

Hold down the TONE button while turning on the keyboard

to disable Auto Power Off.

•When Auto Power Off is disabled, the keyboard does not

turn off automatically no matter how long it is left with no

operation being performed.

•Auto Power Off is automatically enabled whenever you

turn on keyboard power.

735A-E-019A

AC adaptor AD-12

AC outlet

OUT IN

SUSTAIN/

ASSIGNABLE JACK

MIDI

LINE OUT

R L/MONO

DC 12V

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM17

E-18

Power Supply

Settings

Tone, rhythm, and other “main keyboard settings” in effect

when you turn off the keyboard manually by pressing

POWER button or when Auto Power Off turns off power are

still in effect the next time you turn power back on.

Main Keyboard Settings

Tone number, layer, split, split point, drawbar organ

tone settings, transpose, tuning, and contrast settings,

touch response, reverb, chorus, DSP, equalizer, rhythm

number, tempo, keyboard channel, MIDI In Chord

Judge on/off, accomp MIDI out on/off, assignable

jack setting, accompaniment volume, user area tones

(Synthesizer Mode), user area accompaniments, user

DSP area, pitch bend range, Auto Harmonize on/off,

Auto Harmonize type, Mixer hold, DSP hold, Auto

Accompaniment mode, all Mixer parameters, all

Synthesizer Mode parameters, Song Memory song

numbers, SMF player settings (play mode, manual

play part, SMF playback volume)

Turning Off the Keyboard

•Be sure to press the POWER button to turn off power and

make sure that the LCD backlight is off before disconnecting

the AC adaptor or doing anything else.

•Never disconnect the AC adaptor while the keyboard is

turned on or try to turn off power using any other technique

besides pressing the POWER button. Doing so can cause

the contents of the keyboard’s Flash memory to become

corrupted. Strange keyboard operation and abnormal

startup when power is turned on are symptoms of

corrupted Flash memory contents. See “Troubleshooting”

on page E-106 for more information.

IMPORTANT!

•Never press the POWER button while the following

message is on the keyboard’s display.

(message) “Pls Wait” or “Bulk In”

Turning off the keyboard while the above message is

on the display can cause user data (user tones, song

memory data, etc.) currently stored in keyboard memory

or on external media to become corrupted. Once

corrupted, you may not be able to recall the data again.

Memory Contents

In addition to the above settings, data stored in the

Registration Mode and Song Memory Mode is also retained

when keyboard power is turned off.

735A-E-020A

Saving Setups and Memory Contents

About Flash memory

Your keyboard comes with built-in Flash memory, which can

continue to hold data even when electrical power is totally

cut off. This means that even after batteries go completely

dead, you can attach the AC adaptor, turn on power, and still

recall data stored in memory.

You can back up keyboard memory contents and other data

using the media described below.

•SmartMediaTM Card

See “Using a SmartMedia Card” on page E-93.

•Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 only)

See “Using the Floppy Disk Drive (WK-3500 Only)” on page

E-94.

IMPORTANT!

•When running under battery power, be sure to replace

batteries as soon as possible after the first signs of low

battery power (dim power indicator lamp, dim display

characters, etc.) Though the keyboard’s Flash memory

is non-volatile (which means that data is not lost when

power is interrupted), data can be lost if power suddenly

fails while data is being written to flash memory*.

*While storing or deleting user data, while recording

with the synthesizer, while transferring data from a

computer, etc.

Initializing the Keyboard

Use the procedure on page E-80 to initialize the keyboard,

which clears all memory data and returns settings to their

initial factory defaults.

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM18

E-19

Connections

• WK-3500

Phones and Line Out Terminals

Before connecting phones or other external equipment, be

sure to first turn down the volume settings of the keyboard

and the connected equipment. You can then adjust volume

to the desired level after connections are complete.

[Front]

Connecting Phones 1

Connecting phones cuts off output from the keyboard’s built-

in speakers, so you can play even late at night without

disturbing anyone.

[Rear Panel]

Connecting to Audio Equipment 2

Use commercially available cords to connect to the two jacks

as shown in Figure 2. It is up to you to purchase connecting

cables like the ones shown in the illustration for connection.

Normally in this configuration, you must set the audio

equipment’s input selector to the setting that specifies the

terminal (such as AUX IN) that the keyboard is connected to.

Use the keyboard’s VOLUME knob to adjust the volume level.

OUT IN

SUSTAIN/

ASSIGNABLE JACK

MIDI

LINE OUT

R L/MONO

DC 12V

Standard plugs

Guitar amplifier,

keyboard amplifier, etc.

Audio amplifier AUX IN, etc. PIN plug

Standard jacks

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

LEFT

(White)

RIGHT

(Red)

Connecting to a Musical Instrument Amplifier 3

Use commercially available cords to connect to the two jacks

as shown in Figure 3. It is up to you to purchase connecting

cables like the ones shown in the illustration for connection.

Use the keyboard’s VOLUME knob to adjust the volume level.

•If your amplifier has only one input jack, connect a cord to

the L/MONO jack only.

NOTE

•You can also connect the keyboard’s MIDI terminal to a

computer or sequencer. See “MIDI” on page E-89 for

details.

735A-E-021A

PHONES Terminal

Stereo standard plug

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM19

E-20

Connections

• WK-3000

Phones/Output Terminal

Before connecting phones or other external equipment, be

sure to first turn down the volume settings of the keyboard

and the connected equipment. You can then adjust volume

to the desired level after connections are complete.

[Front]

Connecting Phones 1

Connecting phones cuts off output from the keyboard’s built-

in speakers, so you can play even late at night without

disturbing anyone.

Audio Equipment 2

Connect the keyboard to a audio equipment using a

commercially available connecting cord with a standard plug

on one end and two PIN plugs on the other end. Note that

the standard plug you connect to the keyboard must be a

stereo plug, otherwise you will be able to output only one of

stereo channels. In this configuration, you normally set the

input selector of the audio equipment to the terminal (usually

marked AUX IN or something similar) where the cord from

the keyboard is connected. See the user documentation that

comes with your audio equipment for full details.

Musical Instrument Amplifier 3

Use a commercially available connecting cord to connect the

keyboard to a musical instrument amplifier.

NOTE

•Be sure to use a connecting cord that has a stereo

standard plug on the end you connect to the keyboard,

and a connector that provides dual channel (left and

right) input to the amplifier to which you are connecting.

The wrong type of connector at either end can cause

one of the stereo channels to be lost.

•When connected to a musical instrument amplifier, set the

volume of the keyboard to a relatively low level and make

output volume adjustments using the amplifier’s controls.

LEFT RIGHT

AUX IN or similar terminal

of audio amplifier

White Red

PIN plug

Stereo standard

plug

Audio connection

PHONES/OUTPUT Terminal

Keyboard amp,

guitar amp, etc.

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

PIN jack

PIN plug (red)

PIN plug (white)

Stereo standard plug Keyboard or

guitar amp

To keyboard’s

PHONES/OUTPUT

terminal

Standard plug

Connection Example

NOTE

•You can also connect the keyboard to a computer or

sequencer. See “MIDI” on page E-89 for details.

735A-E-022A

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM20

E-21

Sustain Pedal

•With piano tones, depressing the pedal causes notes to

linger, much like a piano’s damper pedal.

•With organ tones, depressing the pedal causes notes to

continue to sound until the pedal is released.

Sostenuto Pedal

•As with the sustain pedal function described above,

depressing the sostenuto pedal causes notes to be sustained.

•This difference between a sostenuto and sustain pedal is

the timing. With a sostenuto pedal, you press the keys and

then depress the pedal before you release the keys. Only

the notes that are sounding when the pedal is depressed

are sustained.

Soft Pedal

Depressing the pedal softens the sound of the notes being

played.

Rhythm Start/Stop Pedal

In this case, the pedal performs the same functions as the

START/STOP button.

Accessories and Options

Use only the accessories and options specified for this

keyboard. Use of non-authorized items creates the danger of

fire, electrical shock, and personal injury.

OUT IN

SUSTAIN/

ASSIGNABLE JACK

MIDI

LINE OUT

R L/MONO

DC 12V

SP-20

SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK Terminal

Sustain/Assignable jack Terminal

You can connect an optional sustain pedal (SP-2 or SP-20) to

the SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK terminal to enable the

capabilities described below.

For details on how to select the pedal function you want, see

“Changing Other Settings” on page E-79.

Connections

735A-E-023B

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM21

E-22

This section provides information on performing basic

keyboard operations.

To play the keyboard

Press the POWER button to turn the keyboard on.

Use the VOLUME knob to set the volume to a

relatively low level.

Play something on the keyboard.

Selecting a Tone

This keyboard comes with tones built-in, as shown below.

A partial list of the available tone names is printed on the

keyboard console. See the “Tone List” on page A-1 of this

manual for a complete list. “Advanced Tones”, are variations

of standard tones, which are created by programming in

effects (DSP) and other settings.

For details about drawbar organ tones, see “Using the

Drawbar Organ Mode” on page E-26.

Tone Types

Standard Tones: 516 Preset Tones + 124 User Tones

Basic Operations

Drawbar Organ Tones: 50 Preset Tones + 100 User Tones

*1: See “Changing Tones and Configuring DSP Effect

Settings” on page E-23.

*2: Memory area for tones created by you. See “Synthesizer

Mode” on page E-51. User tone areas 600 through 699

initially contain the same data as DSP types 000 through

099.

*3: Depends on source tone or user setting. See “Synthesizer

Mode” on page E-51 for more information.

*4: Area for data transferred from a computer. See “Using

the Data Downloard Service” on page E-91 for more

information. For information about waveforms, see

“Creating a User Tone” on page E-54.

*5: Depends on tone. This status can be checked by viewing

the DSP button. See “About the DSP Button” on page E-

34 for more information.

*6: Memory area for tones created by you. See “To edit a

drawbar organ tone” on page E-28. User drawbar organ

tone areas initially contain two sets of the same data as

drawbar organ tones types 000 through 049.

NOTE

•You cannot select tone numbers not included in the

above range (standard tones 516 through 599 and 720

through 799, and drawbar organ tones from 050 to 099).

When you use the [+] and [–] buttons to scroll through

tone numbers, scrolling jumps across the unused

numbers. Pressing [+] when 515 is selected, for

example, jumps to 600.

735A-E-024A

Number

000 - 299

300 - 499

500 - 515

600 - 699

700 - 719

800 - 803

Number

of Tones

300

200

100

Tone Type

Advanced Tones

Preset Tones

Drum Sets

User Tones*2

User Tones with Waves*

User Drum Sets with

Waves*4

DSP Line

On/Off*

Off

On/Off*3

On/Off*5

Number

000 - 049

100 - 199

Number

of Tones

100

Tone Type

Preset Tones

User Tones*6

DSP Line

On/Off*

On/Off*5

On/Off*3

VOLUME

POWER TONE

Number buttons

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM22

E-23

To select a tone

Find the tone you want to use in the tone list and

note its tone number.

Press the TONE button.

Use the number buttons to input the three digit tone

number for the tone you want to select.

Example: To select “332 ACOUSTIC BASS GM”, input

3, 3 and then 2.

NOTE

•Always input all three digits for the tone number,

including leading zeros (if any).

•You can also increment the displayed tone number by

pressing [+] and decrement it by pressing [–].

•When one of the drum sets is selected (tone numbers

500 through 515), each keyboard key is assigned a

different percussion sound. See page A-12 for details.

Polyphony

The term polyphony refers to the maximum number of notes

you can play at the same time. The keyboard has 32-note

polyphony, which includes the notes you play as well as the

rhythms and auto-accompaniment patterns that are played

by the keyboard. This means that when a rhythm or auto-

accompaniment pattern is being played by the keyboard, the

number of notes (polyphony) available for keyboard play is

reduced. Also note that some of the tones offer only 10-note

polyphony.

Aco . Bs_G

Basic Operations

Digital Sampling

A number of the tones that are available with this keyboard

have been recorded and processed using a technique called

digital sampling. To ensure a high level of tonal quality,

samples are taken in the low, mid, and high ranges and then

combined to provide you with sounds that are amazingly

close to the originals. You may notice very slight differences

in volume or sound quality for some tones when you play

them at different positions on the keyboard. This is an

unavoidable result of multiple sampling, and it is not a sign

of malfunction.

Changing Tones and Configuring

DSP Effect Settings

This keyboard has only a single DSP sound source. Because

of this, selecting tones for which DSP is enabled for multiple

parts when layering or splitting tones (page E-74, 75) can

cause conflicts. To avoid conflicts, DSP is allocated to the last

DSP enabled tone, and DSP is disabled (DSP line OFF) for all

other parts.

DSP line is a parameter that controls whether or not the

currently selected DSP effect is applied to a part.* Each tone

has a DSP line parameter. Selecting a tone for a part applies

the tone’s DSP line parameter setting to all parts.

* The DSP line parameter is turned on (DSP effect is applied)

for the 300 Advanced Tones numbered 000 through 299,

and turned off (DSP effect not applied) for the 200 preset

tones from 300 to 499. For information about other tones,

see “Tone Types” on page E-22.

735A-E-025A

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM23

E-24

Basic Operations

PIANO SETTING Button

Pressing this button changes the setup of the keyboard to

optimize it for piano play.

Settings

Tone Number: “000 St.GrPno”

Rhythm Number: “120 Pf Bld 1”

Accompaniment Mode: Normal

Layer: Off

Split: Off

Auto Harmonize: Off

Transpose: 0

Touch Response:

Off: Returns to initial default

On: No change

Assignable Jack: SUS

Local Control: On

Mixer Channel 1 Parameter Setup: Depends on tone

To optimize keyboard settings for

piano play

Press the PIANO SETTING button.

Now try playing something on the keyboard.

•The notes you play will sound with a piano tone.

•If you want to play with rhythm accompaniment,

press the START/STOP button. This causes a rhythm

that is optimized for piano will start to play.

•To stop rhythm play, press the START/STOP button

again.

NOTE

•Pressing the PIANO SETTING button while a rhythm is

playing stops rhythm play and then changes the

keyboard setup.

•Pressing the PIANO SETTING button while the keyboard

is in the Synthesizer Mode or other mode exits the

current mode and then changes the keyboard setup.

•The setup of the keyboard does not change if you press

the PIANO SETTING button when any one of the

following exists.

*During real-time recording, step recording, or while

using the editing function of the Song Memory

*While the data save or overwrite message is on the

display

*During a registration data save operation

735A-E-026A

PIANO SETTING

PITCH BEND wheel

MODULATION wheel PITCH BEND wheel

MODULATION button

●WK-3500 ●WK-3000

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM24

E-25

Using the MODULATION

Modulation applies vibrato, which modulates the pitch of a

note. It works best with notes that are sustained (held) by

keeping a keyboard key held down, especially when playing

the melody with a violin or other similar tone.

You can modify the modulation effect using DSP parameter

0 through 7. For more information, see “DSP Parameters” on

page E-33.

• WK-3500

To use the MODULATION Wheel

While playing melody notes with your right hand,

rotate the MODULATION wheel with your left

hand to apply vibrato to the notes.

•The amount of vibrato applied depends on how far

you rotate the MODULATION wheel upwards.

Setting the wheel to its neutral position (rotated as

far downwards as it can go) turns vibrato off.

• WK-3000

To use the MODULATION button

While holding down a keyboard key with your right

hand, use your left hand to press the

MODULATION button.

•Vibrato is applied as long as the MODULATION

button is depressed.

NOTE

•Modulation can be used to add greater expression to

sustained melody notes being played using a violin,

synthetic reed, or other similar tone.

•Modulation affects different tones in different ways.

Using the PITCH BEND Wheel

As its name suggests, the PITCH BEND wheel lets you “bend”

the pitch of a sound. This makes it possible to add a touch of

realism to saxophone and other tones.

To use the PITCH BEND wheel

While holding down a keyboard key with your right

hand, use your left hand to rotate the PITCH BEND

wheel up and down.

•Releasing the PITCH BEND wheel returns the note

to its original pitch.

NOTE

•With saxophone and electrical guitar tones, the most

realistic sounding effects can be produced if you play

notes and operate the PITCH BEND wheel

simultaneously.

•See “Pitch Bend Range (Initial Default: 12)” on page E-

82 for changing the bend range of the PITCH BEND

wheel.

•Never turn on keyboard power while the PITCH BEND

wheel is rotated.

Basic Operations

735A-E-027B

WK3000_e_10-25.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM25

E-26

Using the Drawbar Organ Mode

Your keyboard has built-in “drawbar organ tones” that can be altered using nine digital drawbars whose operations are similar to

the controls on a drawbar organ. You can also select percussion or key click. There is room in memory for storage of up to 100

user-created drawbar tone variations.

Drawbar Organ Mode Operational Flow

Tone/Rhythm Selection Screeen*

Drawbar Organ Tone Selection Screen

DRAWBAR ORGAN button

Drawbar Organ Tone Editing Screen

“More?” Screen

EXIT button

[왘] CURSOR button DRAWBAR ORGAN button

Synthesizer Editing Screen

[왔] CURSOR button [왖] CURSOR button

DSP Effect Editing Screen

[왔] CURSOR button [왖] CURSOR button

Name/Save Setting Screen

[왔] CURSOR button [왖] CURSOR button

[왗] / [왘] CURSOR buttons [왗] / [왘] CURSOR buttons

* You can also display the drawbar organ tone selection screen from the Song Memory Mode or SMF Playback Mode screen. In

this case, however, the Drawbar Organ Tone Editing Screen does not appear.

735A-E-028A

WK3000_e_26-37.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM26

E-27

Ft16’

8 4 2

2 1

116

CLICK SECOND THIRD

PERCUSSION

DECAY

Decrease

Currently selected

parameter

Value Parameter Name

Increase

Currently selected drawbar

Drawbar buttons

Using the Drawbar Organ Mode

735A-E-029A

Channel Buttons while the Drawbar Organ Tone Selection Screen is Displayed

The 18 buttons along the bottom of the display function as drawbar buttons while the drawbar organ tone selection screen is on

the display (after you press the DRAWBAR ORGAN button). Each pair of buttons (upper and lower) represents a drawbar, which

means that the 18 buttons provide you with the function of nine drawbars.

“ ’ ”: Feet

Each of the nine button pairs is assigned values ranging from 16 feet to 1 foot. Each button pair has a decrease button (for

decreasing by 16 feet, 5-1/3 feet, etc.) and an increase button (for increasing by 16 feet, 5-1/3 feet, etc.).

WK3000_e_26-37.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM27

E-28

Using the Drawbar Organ Mode

735A-E-030A

To select a drawbar organ tone

Find the drawbar organ tone you want to use in

the tone list and note its tone number.

Press the DRAWBAR ORGAN button.

•This causes the drawbar organ tone selection screen

to appear.

Use the number buttons to input the three digit tone

number for the tone you want to select.

NOTE

•Always input all three digits for the tone number,

including leading zeros (if any).

•You can also increment the displayed tone number by

pressing [+] and decrement it by pressing [–].

To edit a drawbar organ tone

Select the drawbar organ tone (000 to 049, 100 to

199) you want to edit.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to display

the drawbar organ tone editing screen. Select the

parameter whose setting you want to change.

Example: Selecting the “Ft16’” parameter

•There are a total of 13 parameters. You can use the

[왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to cycle through them.

See “Parameter Details” on page E-29 for more

information.

•While the “More?” screen is on the display, you can

advance to the synthesizer and DSP effect editing

screens by pressing the [왔] CURSOR button or the

[+] button.

Use the [왖] and [왔] CURSOR buttons or the [+]

and [–] buttons to change the setting of the currently

displayed parameter.

•You can also change a parameter setting by entering

a value with the number buttons.

•You can monitor the changes in a tone by playing

notes on the keyboard as you adjust parameter

settings.

NOTE

•Selecting a different tone after you edit parameters

replaces parameter settings with those of the newly

selected tone.

•If you have drawbar organ tones assigned to more than

one channel, changing the drawbar organ setting for one

of the channels causes the same setting to be applied

to all of the other channels as well.

•See “To save an edited drawbar organ tone” on page E-

30 for information about saving your edits.

Ro c kOr

Tone Number Tone Name

Ft16’

Parameter Setting Parameter Name

DRAWBAR ORGAN

Number buttons

[+]/[–]

CURSOR

WK3000_e_26-37.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM28

E-29

Using the Drawbar Organ Mode

735A-E-031B

Editing Synthesizer Mode Parameters

and DSP Parameters of Drawbar Tones

As with standard (non-drawbar) tones, you can edit the

Synthesizer Mode parameters and DSP parameters of

drawbar organ tones. See “Drawbar Organ Mode Operational

Flow” on page E-26.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to display

“More?”, and then press the [왔] CURSOR button.

•This enters the Synthesizer Mode, which is indicated

by the indicator next to SYNTH on the display screen.

•For the remainder of this procedure, perform the steps

starting from step 3 under “Creating a User Tone” on

page E-54.

Parameter Details

The following provides details about the parameters you can

configure using the drawbar organ tone editing screen.

Drawbar Position

This parameter defines the position of each drawbar, and the

volume of each overtone. The larger the value, the greater

the corresponding overtone’s volume.

(Ft: Feet)

Click

The parameter determines whether or not a key click is added

when a sustained tone configured using the drawbars is

played.

Parameter Name

Drawbar 16’

Drawbar 5 1/3’

Drawbar 8’

Drawbar 4’

Drawbar 2 2/3’

Drawbar 2’

Drawbar 1 3/5’

Drawbar 1 1/3’

Drawbar 1’

Parameter Display

Indication

Ft 16’

Ft 5 1/3’

Ft 8’

Ft 4’

Ft 2 2/3’

Ft 2’

Ft 1 3/5’

Ft 1 1/3’

Ft 1’

Settings

0 to 3

Parameter Name

Click

Parameter Display

Indication

Click

Settings

oFF .... Click Off

on ....... Click On

Percussion

This parameter lets you add percussion sound, which

provides modulation to sustained tones that you create. When

you hold down a key on the keyboard, the sound produced

decays until it is no longer audible. Pressing the key again

sounds the note again at a louder volume. Percussion has

“2nd Percussion” (2nd overtone pitch) and “3rd Percussion”

(3rd overtone pitch) settings, each of which can be turned on

or off.

You can also specify the percussion decay time, which controls

how long it takes for the percussion sound to decay.

Parameter Name

2nd Percussion

3rd Percussion

Percussion

Decay Time

Parameter Display

Indication

Second

Third

Decay

Settings

oFF .... Click Off

on ....... Click On

oFF .... Off

on ....... On

000 to 127

WK3000_e_26-37.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM29

E-30

Using the Drawbar Organ Mode

735A-E-032A

To save an edited drawbar organ

tone

After editing parameters, use the [왗] and [왘]

CURSOR buttons to display “More?”.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button three times to display

the screen for inputting a tone name and assigning

a tone number.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons to select a tone number.

•You can select a tone number in the range of 100 to

199.

After the tone name is the way you want, press the

[왘] CURSOR button to store the tone.

•Use the [+] and [–] buttons to scroll through letters at

the current cursor location.

•Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to move the

cursor left and right.

•See the page E-103 for information about inputting

text.

After everything is the way you want, press the [왔]

CURSOR button to store the tone.

• This will display a confirmation message asking

whether you really want to save the data. Press the

YES button to save the data.

•After the save operation is complete, the message

“Complete” appears and then the display returns to

the tone selection or rhythm selection screen.

•To cancel save, press the EXIT button.

Display Contents in the Drawbar Organ Mode

In the Drawbar Organ Mode, the current status of the drawbar

positions, key click, and percussion parameters are indicated

on the display’s bar graph as shown in the illustrations below.

There is one line for each parameter, and the bottom segment

of the selected parameter line flashes.

The bottom segment of the bar graph column that represents

the currently selected parameter flashes to indicate that it is

selected.

None of the channel numbers (1 to 16) are displayed in the

drawbar organ tone mode and editing mode.

Drawbar Position Graph

Click and Percussion On/Off Graph

Setting Value 0 1 2 3

Display

Setting Value Off On

Display

Percussion Decay Time Graph

Setting Value 0-31 32-63 64-95 96-127

Display

Off

Blink

[+]/[–]

CURSOR

WK3000_e_26-37.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM30

E-31

Applying Effects to Tones

This keyboard provides you with a selection of effects that

you can apply to tones.

The built-in effects include a wide variety of variations that

give you access to a selection of general digital effects.

Effect Blocks

The following shows how the effects of this keyboard are

organized.

off

DSP Line

DSP button

16ch

Sound Source

DSP

REVERB

CHORUS

EQUALIZER

Output

DSP

DSP effects are applied to the connection between the sound

source and output. You can select distortion and modulation

effects. You can create DSP effect setups and also transfer

downloaded DSP data from your computer. The keyboard

has memory that lets you store up to 100 DSP effect setups.

See “Using the Data Download Service” on page E-91 and

“Saving the Settings of DSP Parameters” on page E-33 for

more information.

REVERB

Reverb simulates the acoustics of specific types of

environments. You can choose from among 16 different reverb

effects, including “Room” and “Hall”.

CHORUS

The chorus effect gives sound greater depth by causing it to

vibrate. You can choose from among 16 different chorus

effects, including “Chorus” and “Flanger”.

EQUALIZER

The equalizer is another type of effect that you can use to

make adjustments in tone quality. Frequencies are divided

among a number of bands, and raising and lowering the level

of each frequency band alters the sound.

You can reproduce the optimal acoustics for the type of music

you are playing (classics, for example) by selecting the

applicable equalizer setting.

Channel Buttons while the Effect Mode Screen is Displayed

In the Effect Mode, the 18 buttons along the bottom of the display screen control the type and parameters of each effect, a shown

in the illustration below.

NOTE

•Pressing the [왖] and [왔] CURSOR buttons at the same time returns the currently selected effect to its preset value.

8 4 2

2 1

116

Decrease

Increase

Currently selected drawbar

CHANNEL buttons

Effect type Parameter 1 Parameter 3 Parameter 5 Parameter 7

Parameter 0 Parameter 2 Parameter 4 Parameter 6

735A-E-033A

WK3000_e_26-37.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM31

E-32

Applying Effects to Tones

Selecting a DSP Type

In addition to the 100 built-in effect types, you can also edit

effect types to create your own and store them in user

memory. You can have up to 100 effect types in user memory

at one time. You can also select the DSP type of the last DSP

enabled tone that you used. This means you always have

access to the DSP type of Advanced Tones and tones you

download over the Internet. To select the DSP type of the last

DSP enabled tone that you used, select “ton” in step 3 of the

procedure below.

Perform the following steps to select a DSP type.

PREPARATION

•When using a DSP effect, you should use the Mixer to

confirm that the DSP lines of the required parts are

turned on. See “Mixer Function” on page E-47 for more

information.

Press the EFFECT button so the pointer appears next

to EFFECT on the display.

Press the [왘] CURSOR button.

•The DSP type setting screen will appear automatically

about fives seconds after you press the button.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons or number buttons to

select the type of DSP you want.

•See the “Effect List” on page A-17 for information

about the DSP types that can be selected.

•Here you could also change the parameters of the

effect you selected, if you want. See “Changing the

Settings of DSP Parameters” for more information.

NOTE

•The DSP type display area shows the DSP number (000

to 199), or “ton” (user tone created using DSP).

Changing the Settings of DSP

Parameters

You can control the relative strength of a DSP and how it is

applied. See the following section titled “DSP Parameters”

for more information.

After selecting the DSP type you want, use the [왗]

and [왘] CURSOR buttons to display the parameter

whose setting you want to change.

•This displays the parameter setting screen.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons or the number buttons

to make the parameter setting you want.

•Pressing the [+] and [–] buttons at the same time

returns the parameter to its recommended setting.

Press the EFFECT or EXIT button.

•This exits the tone or rhythm setting screen.

735A-E-034A

CURSOREFFECT

Number buttons

[+]/[–]

EXIT

WK3000_e_26-37.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM32

E-33

Applying Effects to Tones

DSP Parameters

The following describes the parameters for each DSP.

DSP

■

Parameter 0 to 7

These parameters differ in accordance with the algorithm*

of the selected DSP type. See the “Effect List” on page A-

17 and the “DSP Algorithm List” on page A-19 for more

information.

* Effector structure and operation type

■

DSP Reverb Send (Range: 000 to 127)

Specifies how much of the post-DSP sound should be sent

to reverb.

■

DSP Chorus Send (Range: 000 to 127)

Specifies how much of the post-DSP sound should be sent

to chorus.

NOTE

•Whether or not an effect is applied to the parts that are

sounding also depends on Mixer Mode Reverb Send,

Chorus Send, and DSP on/off settings. See “Mixer

Function” on page E-47 for more information.

•Playing a demo tune (page E-12) automatically changes

the effect to the one that is assigned to the tune. You

cannot change or cancel a demo tune effect.

•Changing the effect setting while sound is being output

by the keyboard causes a slight break in the sound when

the effect changes.

•A number of tones, called “Advanced Tones”,

automatically turn on the DSP line for richer, higher

quality sound. If you assign an Advanced Tone to a

keyboard part (Channels 1 through 4), the DSP line turns

on automatically and the DSP selection changes in

accordance with the settings of the Advanced Tone. Also,

the Mixer Mode DSP line on/off setting for the keyboard

part to which the Advanced Tone is assigned is turned

on.*

*The Mixer DSP line setting is automatically turned off

for each part that does not have an Advanced Tone

assigned.

Because of this, DSP effects previously applied to

these parts are cancelled, which can make their tone

sound different. In this case, display the Mixer screen

and turn DSP back on.

Saving the Settings of DSP

Parameters

You can save up to 100 modified DSPs in the user area for

later recall when you need them.

NOTE

•User DSP areas 100 through 199 initially contain the

same data as DSP types 000 through 099.

After making the DSP parameter settings you want,

press the [왔] CURSOR button.

•This causes the DSP number of the user area where

the DSP will be saved to flash on the display.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons to select the user DSP

area number where you want to save the new DSP.

•You can select a user DSP area number in the range of

100 to 199 only.

After the user DSP area number you want is

selected, press the [왘] CURSOR button.

•Use the [+] and [–] buttons to scroll through letters at

the current cursor location.

•Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to move the

cursor left and right.

•See the page E-103 for information about inputting

text.

After everything is the way you want, press the [왔]

CURSOR button to store the effect.

• This will display a confirmation message asking

whether you really want to save the data. Press the

YES button to save the data.

•The message “Complete” appears momentarily on the

display, followed by the tone or rhythm selection

screen.

735A-E-035B

WK3000_e_26-37.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM33

E-34

Applying Effects to Tones

Selecting REVERB

Perform the following steps to select REVERB.

Press the EFFECT button, so the pointer appears

next to EFFECT on the display screen.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button once.

•This displays the reverb editing screen.

Press the [왘] CURSOR button.

•The reverb type setting screen will appear

automatically about fives seconds after you press the

button.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons or the number buttons

to scroll through the reverb types until the one you

want is displayed, or use the number buttons to

input the reverb number you want to select.

•See the list on page A-17 for information about the

types of REVERB effects that are available.

•Here you could also change the parameters of the

effect you selected, if you want. See “Changing the

Settings of REVERB Parameters” for more

information.

Pointer

About the DSP Button

Checking the DSP button will tell you whether or not DSP is

enabled for the tone that is currently selected for a part. The

DSP button will be lit for a tone that is DSP enabled (DSP

line ON), and unlit for a tone that is DSP disabled (DSP line

OFF). For example, when you move each part while using

the split/layer function, the DSP button lights or goes out in

accordance with that parts setting.

Pressing the DSP button toggles the tone of the part you are

currently playing on the keyboard between enabled (DSP line

ON) and disabled (DSP line OFF).

To turn DSP line on and off

Press the DSP button to toggle DSP line for the

currently selected part on and off.

735A-E-036B

CURSOREFFECT DSP

Number buttons

[+]/[–]

EXIT

WK3000_e_26-37.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM34

E-35

Applying Effects to Tones

REVERB Parameters

Reverb effects are associated with either a reverb type or delay

type. Parameter settings depend upon the associated type.

Reverb Type (No. 0 to 5, 8 to 13)

■

Reverb Level (Range: 000 to 127)

Controls the reverb size. A larger number produces larger

reverb.

■

Reverb Time (Range: 000 to 127)

Controls how long reverb continues. A larger number

produces longer reverb.

■

ER Level (Initial Echo Sound) (Range: 000 to 127)

This parameter controls the initial reverb volume. The

initial echo sound is the first sound reflected from the

walls and ceiling when a sound is output by this keyboard.

A larger value specifies a larger echo sound.

■

High Damp (Range: 000 to 127)

Adjusts the damping of high frequency reverberation

(high sound). A smaller value damps high sounds,

creating a dark reverb. A larger value does not damp high

sounds, for a brighter reverb.

Delay Type (No. 6, 7, 14, 15)

■

Delay Level (Range: 000 to 127)

Specifies the size of the delay sound. A higher value

produces a larger delay sound.

■

Delay Feedback (Range: 000 to 127)

Adjusts delay repeat. A higher value produces a greater

number of repeats.

■

ER Level

Same as Reverb Type

■

High Damp

Same as Reverb Type

NOTE

•Whether or not an effect is applied to the parts that are

sounding also depends on Mixer Mode Reverb Send,

Chorus Send, and DSP on/off settings. See “Mixer

Function” on page E-47 for more information.

SRv T i me

Changing the Settings of REVERB

Parameters

You can control the relative strength of a reverb and how it is

applied. See the following section titled “REVERB

Parameters” for more information.

After selecting the reverb type you want, use the

[왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to display the

parameter whose setting you want to change.

•This displays the parameter setting screen.

Example: To set the Reverb Time parameter

Use the [+] and [–] buttons or the number buttons

to input the parameter setting you want.

Press the EFFECT or EXIT button.

•This returns to the tone or rhythm selection screen.

735A-E-037A

WK3000_e_26-37.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM35

E-36

Applying Effects to Tones

Changing the Settings of CHORUS

Parameters

You can control the relative strength of an effect and how it is

applied. The parameters you can control depend on the effect.

See the following section titled “CHORUS Parameters” for

more information.

After selecting the chorus type you want, use the

[왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to display the

parameter whose setting you want to change.

•This displays the parameter setting screen.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons or the number buttons

to input the parameter setting you want.

Press the EFFECT or EXIT button.

•This returns to the tone or rhythm selection screen.

CHORUS Parameters

■

Chorus Level (Range: 000 to 127)

Specifies the size of the chorus sound.

■

Chorus Rate (Range: 000 to 127)

Specifies the undulation speed of the chorus sound. A

higher value produces faster undulation.

■

Chorus Depth (Range: 000 to 127)

Specifies the undulation depth of the chorus sound. A

higher value produces deeper undulation.

NOTE

•Whether or not an effect is applied to the parts that are

sounding also depends on Mixer Mode Reverb Send,

Chorus Send, and DSP on/off settings. See “Mixer

Function” on page E-47 for more information.

Selecting CHORUS

Perform the following steps to select CHORUS.

Press the EFFECT button, so the pointer appears

next to EFFECT on the display screen.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button twice.

•This displays the chorus editing screen.

Press the [왘] CURSOR button.

•The chorus type setting screen will appear

automatically about fives seconds after you press the

button.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons or the number buttons

to scroll through the chorus types until the one you

want is displayed, or use the number buttons to

input the chorus number you want to select.

•See the list on page A-17 for information about the

types of CHORUS effects that are available.

•Here you could also change the parameters of the

effect you selected, if you want. See “Changing the

Settings of CHORUS Parameters” for more

information.

735A-E-038A

CURSOREFFECT

Number buttons

[+]/[–]

EXIT

WK3000_e_26-37.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM36

E-37

Applying Effects to Tones

Using the Equalizer

This keyboard has a built-in four-band equalizer and 10

different settings from which you can choose. You can adjust

the gain (volume) of all four equalizer bands within the range

of –12 to 0 to +12.

To select the equalizer type

Press the EFFECT button, so the pointer appears

next to EFFECT on the display screen.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button three times.

•This displays the equalizer editing screen.

Press the [왘] CURSOR button.

•The equalizer type setting screen will appear

automatically about fives seconds after you press the

button.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons or the number buttons

to select the equalizer type you want.

•See the list on page A-17 for information about the

equalizer types that are available.

Example: To select Jazz

•Pressing the EXIT or EFFECT button exits the

equalizer setting screen.

Jazz

To adjust the gain (volume) of a band

After selecting the equalizer type you want, use

the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to select the band

whose gain you want to adjust.

Example: To adjust the HIGH band

Use the [+] and [–] buttons or the number buttons

to adjust the band gain.

Example: To adjust the gain to 10

•Pressing the EXIT or EFFECT button exits the

equalizer setting screen.

NOTE

•Changing to another equalizer type causes the band

gain settings to change to the initial settings for the newly

selected equalizer type automatically.

735A-E-039A

ME H i h

WK3000_e_26-37.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM37

E-38

735A-E-040B

This keyboard automatically plays bass and chord parts in

accordance with the chords you finger. The bass and chord

parts are played using sounds and tones that are

automatically selected to select the rhythm you are using.

All of this means that you get full, realistic accompaniments

for the melody notes you play with your right hand, creating

the mood of a one-person ensemble.

Auto Accompaniment

About the MODE Button

Use the MODE button to select the accompaniment mode you

want to use. Each press of the MODE button cycles through

the available accompaniment modes as shown in the

illustration below.

Normal (Auto Accompaniment off)

FULL RANGE CHORD

FINGERED

CASIO CHORD

•Only rhythm sounds are produced when all

accompaniment mode lamps are off.

•The currently selected accompaniment mode is shown by

the mode lamps above the MODE button. Information on

using each of these modes starts from page E-40.

RHYTHM

TEMPOVARIATION/FILL-IN 1/2

Number buttons

WK3000_e_38-46.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM38

E-39

735A-E-041A

Auto Accompaniment

Selecting a Rhythm

This keyboard provides you with 140 exciting rhythms that

you can select using the following procedure.

You can also transfer accompaniment data from your

computer and store up to 16 of them as user rhythms in

keyboard memory. See “Using the Data Download Service”

on page E-91 for more information.

NOTE

•Initially, nothing is stored in the user rhythm memory

area.

To select a rhythm

Find the rhythm you want to use in the rhythm list

and note its rhythm number.

Press the RHYTHM button.

•Not all of the available rhythms are shown on the

rhythm list printed on the keyboard console. For a

complete list, see the “Rhythm List” on page A-14.

Use the number buttons to input the three digit

rhythm number for the rhythm you want to select.

Example: To select “041 ROCK 2”, input 0, 4 and then 1.

NOTE

•You can also increment the displayed rhythm number

by pressing [+] and decrement it by pressing [–].

Appears when RHYTHM button is pressed

Number and name of selected rhythm

8Beat 1

Roc k 2

Playing a Rhythm

To play a rhythm

Press VARIATION/FILL-IN button 1 or 2.

•This starts the play of the selected rhythm.

•To stop rhythm play, press the START/STOP button.

NOTE

•Chords will sound along with the rhythm if any of the

three accompaniment mode lamps above the MODE

button is lit. If you want to play the rhythm pattern without

chords, press the MODE button until all of the lamps

are off.

Adjusting the Tempo

You can adjust the tempo of rhythm play within a range of 30 to

255 beats per minute. The tempo setting is used for Auto

Accompaniment chord play, and song memory operations.

To adjust the tempo

Press one of the TEMPO buttons (왖 or 왔).

왖 : Increments displayed value (increases tempo)

왔 : Decrements displayed value (decreases tempo)

NOTE

•Pressing both TEMPO buttons (왖 and 왔) at the same

time resets the tempo to the default value of the currently

selected rhythm.

WK3000_e_38-46.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM39

E-40

Auto Accompaniment

NOTE

•The accompaniment keyboard can be used for playing

chords only. No sound will be produced if you try playing

single melody notes on the accompaniment keyboard.

CASIO CHORD

This method of chord play makes it possible for anyone to

easily play chords, regardless of previous musical knowledge

and experience. The following describes the CASIO CHORD

“accompaniment keyboard” and “melody keyboard”, and

tells you how to play CASIO CHORDs.

CASIO CHORD Accompaniment Keyboard and Melody

Keyboard

Melody keyboard

Accompaniment

keyboard

735A-E-042A

Using Auto Accompaniment

The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard’s

Auto Accompaniment feature. Before starting, you should

first select the rhythm you want to use and set the tempo of

the rhythm to the value you want.

To use Auto Accompaniment

Use the MODE button to select CASIO CHORD,

FINGERED, or FULL RANGE CHORD as the

accompaniment mode.

•The currently selected accompaniment mode is the

one whose lamp is lit. See “About the MODE Button”

on page E-38 for details.

Press the START/STOP button to start play of the

currently selected rhythm.

Play a chord.

•The actual procedure you should use to play a chord

depends on the currently selected accompaniment

mode. Refer to the following pages for details on

chord play.

CASIO CHORD .............................. This page

FINGERED ...................................... Page E-41

FULL RANGE CHORD ................ Page E-42

To stop Auto Accompaniment play, press the START/

STOP button again.

Chord name

Current measure number

and beat number

Basic fingering of current chord

(May be different from chord actually

being played on the keyboard.)

Roc k 2

MODE

START/STOP

WK3000_e_38-46.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM40

E-41

735A-E-043A

FINGERED

FINGERED provides you with a total of 15 different chord

types. The following describes the FINGERED

“accompaniment keyboard” and “melody keyboard”, and

tells you how to play a C-root chord using FINGERED.

FINGERED Accompaniment Keyboard and Melody

Keyboard

NOTE

•The accompaniment keyboard can be used for playing

chords only. No sound will be produced if you try playing

single melody notes on the accompaniment keyboard.

Melody keyboard

Accompaniment

keyboard

See the “Fingered Chord Chart” on page A-15 for details on

playing chords with other roots.

*1: Inverted fingerings cannot be used. The lowest note is

the root.

*2: The same chord can be played without pressing the 5th G.

Caug *1

Cm7 *2

C75 *1

Cmadd9 *2

Csus4

Cmaj7 *2

C7sus4

CmM7 *2

Cdim

C7 *2

Cm75

Cadd9 *2

Cdim7 *1

Auto Accompaniment

Example

C Major (C)

C minor (Cm)

C seventh (C7)

C minor seventh (Cm7)

Chord Types

Major chords

Major chord names are marked

above the keys of the

accompaniment keyboard.

Note that the chord produced

when you press an

accompaniment keyboard does

not change octave, regardless

of which key you use to play it.

Minor chords (m)

To play a minor chord, keep

the major chord key depressed

and press any other

accompaniment keyboard key

located to the right of the

major chord key.

Seventh chords (7)

To play a seventh chord, keep

the major chord key depressed

and press any other two

accompaniment keyboard keys

located to the right of the

major chord key.

Minor seventh chords (m7)

To play a minor seventh chord,

keep the major chord key

depressed and press any other

three accompaniment

keyboard keys located to the

right of the major chord key.

CCDE FF

#



CCDE F

#

CCDE FF

#



CCDE F

#

CCDE FF

#



CCDE F

#

CCDE FF

#



CCDE F

#

NOTE

•It makes no difference whether you press black or white

keys to the right of a major chord key when playing minor

and seventh chords.

Chord Types

CASIO CHORD accompaniment lets you play four types of

chords with minimal fingering.

WK3000_e_38-46.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM41

E-42

Chords Recognized by This Keyboard

The following table identifies patterns that are recognized as

chords by FULL RANGE CHORD.

Pattern Type

FINGERED

Standard

Fingerings

Number of Variations

The 15 chord patterns shown

under FINGERED on page E-41.

See the “Fingered Chord Chart” on

page A-15 for details on playing

chords with other roots.

23 standard chord fingerings. The

following are examples of the 23

chords available with C as the bass

note.

Example: To play the chord C major.

Any of the fingerings shown in the illustration below will

produce C major.

C6Cm6C69

A

B

Bm

Dm75

A7

Fm7

Gm7

Aadd9

• • • • •

• • • •

C

Cm

• •

EG C

G C

1 ...... Chord C

2 ...... Chord C

Auto Accompaniment

735A-E-044A

NOTE

•Except for the chords specified in note*1above, inverted

fingerings (i.e. playing E-G-C or G-C-E instead of C-E-

G) will produce the same chords as the standard

fingering.

•Except for the exception specified in note*2 above, all

of the keys that make up a chord must be pressed.

Failure to press even a single key will not play the desired

FINGERED chord.

FULL RANGE CHORD

This accompaniment method provides a total of 38 different

chord types: the 15 chord types available with FINGERED

plus 23 additional types. The keyboard interprets any input

of three or more keys that matches a FULL RANGE CHORD

pattern to be a chord. Any other input (that is not a FULL

RANGE CHORD pattern) is interpreted as melody play.

Because of this, there is no need for a separate accompaniment

keyboard, so the entire keyboard, from end to end, functions

as a melody keyboard that can be used for both melody and

chords.

FULL RANGE CHORD Accompaniment Keyboard and

Melody Keyboard

Accompaniment keyboard/Melody keyboard

NOTE

•As with the FINGERED mode (page E-41), you can play

the notes that form a chord in any combination (1).

•When the lowest note of a chord is separated from its

neighboring note by six or more semitones, the lowest

note becomes the bass note (2).

WK3000_e_38-46.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM42

E-43

Auto Accompaniment

735A-E-045B

Using an Intro Pattern

This keyboard lets you insert a short intro into a rhythm

pattern to make startup smoother and more natural.

The following procedure describes how to use the Intro

feature. Before starting, you should first select the rhythm

you want to use, set the tempo, and use the MODE button to

select the chord play method you want to use (Normal,

CASIO CHORD, FINGERED, FULL RANGE CHORD).

To insert an intro

Press INTRO/ENDING button 1 or 2.

•With the above setup, the intro pattern is played and

the auto accompaniment with intro pattern starts as

soon as you play chords on the accompaniment

keyboard.

NOTE

•The standard rhythm pattern starts to play after the intro

pattern is complete.

Using a Fill-in Pattern

Fill-in patterns let you momentarily change the rhythm

pattern to add some interesting variation to your

performances.

The following procedure describes how to use the Fill-in

feature.

To insert a fill-in

Press the START/STOP button to start rhythm play.

Select the fill-in variation you want.

•To insert Fill-in 1, press the VARIATION/FILL-IN 1

button while Variation 1 of the rhythm is playing.

•To insert Fill-in 2, press the VARIATION/FILL-IN 2

button while Variation 2 of the rhythm is playing.

NOTE

•Only the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button is operational

while an intro is playing.

•Holding down the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT or

VARIATION/FILL-IN 1/2 buttons causes the fill-in pattern

to repeat.

Using a Rhythm Variation

In addition to the standard rhythm pattern, you can also

switch to a secondary “variation” rhythm pattern for a bit of

variety .

To insert the variation rhythm pattern

Press the START/STOP button to start rhythm play.

Press the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button.

•If a Variation 1 rhythm is currently playing, this plays

Fill-in 1, followed by Fill-in 2, and then switches to

the Variation 2 rhythm.

•If a Variation 2 rhythm is currently playing, this plays

Fill-in 2, followed by Fill-in 1, and then switches to

the Variation 1 rhythm.

•Holding down the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button

causes the fill-in pattern to repeat.

SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT

START/STOP

INTRO/ENDING 1/2

WK3000_e_38-46.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM43

E-44

Auto Accompaniment

735A-E-046B

Synchro Starting Accompaniment

with Rhythm Play

You can set up the keyboard to start rhythm play at the same

time you play the accompaniment on the keyboard.

The following procedure describes how to use synchro start.

Before starting, you should first select the rhythm you want

to use, set the tempo, and use the MODE button to select the

chord play method you want to use (Normal, CASIO

CHORD, FINGERED, FULL RANGE CHORD).

To use synchro start

Press the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button to put

the keyboard into synchro start standby.

Play a chord and the rhythm pattern starts to play

automatically.

NOTE

•If the MODE button is set to Normal, only the rhythm

plays (without a chord) when you play on the

accompaniment keyboard.

•If you press the INTRO/ENDING button 1 or 2 before

playing anything on the keyboard, the rhythm starts

automatically with an intro pattern when you play

something on the accompaniment keyboard.

•To cancel synchro start standby, press the SYNCHRO/

FILL-IN NEXT button one more time.

Finishing with an Ending Pattern

You can end your performances with an ending pattern that

brings the rhythm pattern you are using to a natural-sounding

conclusion.

The following procedure describes how to insert an ending

pattern. Note that the actual ending pattern played depends

on the rhythm pattern you are using.

To finish with an ending pattern

While the rhythm is playing, press INTRO/ENDING

button 1 or 2.

•The timing when the ending pattern starts depends

on when you press the INTRO/ENDING button 1 or

2. If you press the button before the second beat of

the current measure, the ending pattern starts playing

immediately.

NOTE

•Pressing the INTRO/ENDING button prior to the first half

beat at the beginning of a measure plays the ending

immediately. Pressing the button after the first half beat

of a measure causes the ending to be played from the

beginning of the following measure.

SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT AUTO HARMONIZEINTRO/ENDING 1/2

ONE TOUCH PRESET

MODE

WK3000_e_38-46.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM44

E-45

Auto Accompaniment

735A-E-047B

Using One-touch Preset

One-touch preset automatically makes the main settings listed

below in accordance with the rhythm pattern you are using.

•Keyboard tone

•Layer on/off

•Split on/off

•Auto Harmonize on/off

•Auto Harmonize type

•Accompaniment volume level

•Tempo

•Effect settings

To use one-touch preset

Select the rhythm you want to use.

Use the MODE button to select the accompaniment

mode you want to use.

Press the ONE TOUCH PRESET button.

•This automatically makes the one-touch preset

settings in accordance with the rhythm you selected.

•The keyboard automatically enters synchro standby

at this time.

Start rhythm and Auto Accompaniment, and play

something on the keyboard.

•Accompaniment is played using the one-touch preset

settings.

Normal (Auto Accompaniment off)

FULL RANGE CHORD

FINGERED

CASIO CHORD

Using Auto Harmonize

When you are using Auto Accompaniment, Auto Harmonize

automatically adds additional notes to your melody in

accordance with the chord that is being played. The result is

a harmony effect that makes your melody line richer and

fuller.

To use Auto Harmonize

Use the MODE button to select FINGERED or

CASIO CHORD as the accompaniment mode.

•The currently selected accompaniment mode is the

one whose lamp is lit. See “About the MODE Button”

on page E-38 for details.

Press AUTO HARMONIZE button to turn on Auto

Harmonize.

•This causes the AUTO HARMONIZE indicator to

appear on the display.

Start Auto Accompaniment play, and play

something on the keyboard.

To turn off Auto Harmonize, press AUTO

HARMONIZE button once.

•This causes the AUTO HARMONIZE indicator to

disappear.

NOTE

•Auto Harmonize turns off temporarily whenever you start

demo tune play. It turns back on as soon as the operation

or function that caused it to turn off is finished.

•Auto Harmonize is enabled only when the Auto

Accompaniment mode is FINGERED or CASIO CHORD.

WK3000_e_38-46.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM45

E-46

Auto Harmonize Types

Auto Harmonize lets you select from among the 10 Auto

Harmonize types. Type changing is performed by the setting

item using the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button.

See “Changing Other Settings” on page E-79 for more

information.

About Auto Harmonize notes and

tones

The notes you play on the keyboard are called “melody

notes”, while the notes added to the melody by Auto

Harmonize is called the “harmonize notes”. Auto Harmonize

normally uses the tone you selected for the melody notes as

the tone for the harmonize notes, but you can use the Mixer

(page E-47) to specify a different tone for the harmonize notes.

The harmonize note tone is assigned to Mixer Channel 5, so

change Channel 5 to the tone you want to use for the

harmonize notes.

In addition to the tone, you can also use the Mixer to change

a number of other parameters, such as volume balance. See

“Using the Parameter Edit Mode” on page E-48 for details

on these procedures.

NOTE

•The default harmonize note tone when you first turn on

Auto Harmonize is the same tone as the melody note

tone.

•Changing the melody tone setting automatically changes

the harmonize note tone to the same setting.

Adjusting the Accompaniment

Volume

You can adjust the volume of the accompaniment parts as a

value in the range of 000 (minimum) to 127 (maximum).

Press the ACCOMP VOLUME button.

Use the number buttons or the [+]/[–] buttons to

change the current volume setting value.

Example: 110

NOTE

•Pressing the ACCOMP VOLUME button or EXIT button

returns to the tone or rhythm setting screen.

•Any channel balance settings you make with the Mixer

are maintained when you change the accompaniment

volume setting.

•Pressing [+] and [–] buttons at the same time

automatically sets an accompaniment volume of 100.

Current accompaniment volume setting

Acom

Vo l

Acom

Vo l

Auto Accompaniment

735A-E-048A

ACCOMP VOLUME

Number buttons

[+]/[–]

WK3000_e_38-46.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM46

E-47

735A-E-049B

What you can do with the Mixer

This keyboard lets you play multiple different musical

instrument parts at the same time during auto-

accompaniment play, song memory playback, receipt of data

through the MIDI terminal, etc. The Mixer assigns each part

to a separate channel (1 through 16) and lets you control the

channel on/off, volume, and pan pot parameters of each

channel.

In addition to channels 1 through 16, the Mixer also has a

DSP channel that you can use to adjust the DSP level, DSP

pan, and other DSP parameters.

Channel Assignments

The following shows the parts that are assigned to each of

the 16 channels.

Mixer Function

Channel Part

Number

Channel 1 Main tone (UP1)

Channel 2 Layered tone (UP2)

Channel 3 Split tone (LOW1)

Channel 4 Layered/split tone (LOW2)

Channel 5 Harmonize Tone (HARM)

Channel 6 Auto Accompaniment chord part 1 (CHD1)

Channel 7 Auto Accompaniment chord part 2 (CHD2)

Channel 8 Auto Accompaniment chord part 3 (CHD3)

Channel 9 Auto Accompaniment bass part (BASS)

Channel 10 Auto Accompaniment rhythm part (DRUM)

Channel 11 Song Memory track 1 (TR1)

Channel 12 Song Memory track 2 (TR2)

Channel 13 Song Memory track 3 (TR3)

Channel 14 Song Memory track 4 (TR4)

Channel 15 Song Memory track 5 (TR5)

Channel 16 Song Memory track 6 (TR6)

NOTE

•In this manual, “Channel Number” matches the channel

numbers marked on the keyboard above the CHANNEL

buttons.

•The CHANNEL button name in the above table

corresponds to the text marked on the keyboard below

the CHANNEL buttons.

See page E-74 and E-75 for information on layered, split, and

layered/split tones.

See page E-61 for information on the song memory.

NOTE

•Normally, keyboard play is assigned to Channel 1. When

Auto Accompaniment is being used, each part of the

accompaniment is assigned to Channels 6 through 10.

•When this keyboard is being used as the sound source

for an externally connected computer or other MIDI

device, all 16 channels are assigned musical instrument

parts. The notes played over the channel selected by

operation under “Turning Channels On and Off” below

are shown on the displayed keyboard and staff.

Turning Channels On and Off

Press the CHANNEL buttons to toggle individual channels

on and off. Indicators on the display show the current on/off

status of each channel.

•Each press of a CHANNEL button toggles the applicable

channel on and off.

•The on/off status of each channel determines the on/off

status of the corresponding part for keyboard play, Auto

Accompaniment, and Song Memory playback.

•Changing to a different rhythm causes Mixer Settings for

channel 6 through channel 10 to change to the default

settings assigned to the new rhythm. These settings also

change to the defaults for the currently selected rhythm

pattern whenever you switch between the Intro, Normal,

Variation, Fill-in, and Ending patterns.

Channel on Channel off

WK3000_e_47-58.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM47

E-48

Mixer Function

735A-E-050B

Using the Parameter Edit Mode

Editing the Parameters for Channels

1 through 16

In the Parameter Edit Mode, you can change the settings of

ten different parameters (including tone, volume, and pan

pot) for the channel you selected on the Mixer screen.

To change parameters

Press the MIXER button.

•This causes a pointer to appear on the display next to

MIXER.

Press a CHANNEL button (1 through 16) to select a

channel.

•Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to change

between channels.

Use [왖] and [왔] CURSOR buttons to select the

parameter whose setting you want to change.

Example: Select volume setting by displaying “Volume”.

•Each press of [왖] or [왔] CURSOR button cycles

through the parameters.

•You can use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to

change to another channel at any time during this

procedure.

Indicates channel volume of 127

Vo l ume

Use the number buttons or [+] and [–] to change

the parameter setting.

Example: Change the setting to “060”.

•Pressing the MIXER or EXIT button exits the

parameter edit mode.

Editing DSP Channel Parameters

Press the CHANNEL (DSP) button.

•You can also select the DSP channel by pressing the

[왘] CURSOR button while Channel 16 is selected.

•This selects the DSP channel.

•Pressing the [왗] CURSOR button while the DSP

channel is selected returns to Channel 16.

CHANNELMIXER CURSOR

Number buttons

[+]/[–]

WK3000_e_47-58.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM48

E-49

Mixer Function

735A-E-051A

■

Octave Shift (Range: –2 to 0 to +2)

You can use octave shift to shift the range of the tone up or

down. When using the piccolo tone, there may be cases when

very high notes you want to play are not included within the

range of the keyboard. When this happens, you can use octave

shift to shift the keyboard range one octave up.

–2 : Range shifted two octaves down.

–1 : Range shifted one octave down.

0 : No shift

+1 : Range shifted one octave up.

+2 : Range shifted two octaves up.

Tuning Parameters

You can use these parameters to tune each of the parts

individually.

■

Coarse Tune (Range: –24 to 00 to +24)

This parameter controls the coarse tuning of the selected

channel’s pitch in semitone units.

■

Fine Tune (Range: –99 to 00 to +99)

This parameter controls the fine tuning of the selected

channel’s pitch in cent units.

How Parameters Work

The following are the parameters whose settings can be

changed in the Parameter Edit Mode.

Tone Parameters

■

Tone

(Range: 000 to 803, Drawbar organ tones 000 to 199)

This parameter controls the tones assigned to each part.

Anytime the tone is on the display, you can use the TONE

button or DRAWBAR ORGAN button and then select a

different tone, if you want.

■

Part On/Off (Settings: on, oFF)

This parameter can be used to turn each part on (sounds)

and off (does not sound). The current on/off status of each

part is indicated on the display as described below.

■

Volume (Range: 000 to 127)

This is the parameter that controls the volume of the selected

channel.

■

Pan Pot (Range: –64 to 00 to +63)

This parameter controls the pan pot, which is the center point

of the left and right stereo channels. Setting “00” specifies

center, a value less than “00” moves the point left, and a value

greater than “00” moves it right.

GrandPno

Vo l ume

Pan

C.Tune

Oc t Sh i f t

F i neTune

Channe l

WK3000_e_47-58.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM49

E-50

Rvb Send

Effect Parameters

The Mixer lets you control the effects applied to each

individual part, making it different from the Effect Mode,

whose settings are applied to all parts in general.

■

Reverb Send (Range: 000 to 127)

This parameter controls how much reverb is applied to a part.

A setting of “000” turns reverb off, while a setting of 127

applies maximum reverb.

•“Reverb Send” does not work with some drum sounds.

■

Chorus Send (Range: 000 to 127)

This parameter controls how much chorus send is applied to

a part. A setting “000” turns chorus send off, while a setting

of 127 applies maximum chorus send.

•“Chorus Send” does not work with drum sounds.

■

DSP Line (Settings: on, oFF)

You can use this parameter to turn DSP line off for a particular

channel, or to turn it on.

DSP Part Parameters

■

DSP Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Sets the post-DSP volume.

■

DSP Pan (Range: –64 to 0 to 63)

Sets the post-DSP stereo pan.

DSPL e v e l

DSPPan

D.RvbSnd

D.ChoSnd

Mixer Function

735A-E-052B

■

DSP System Reverb Send (Range: 000 to 127)

This parameter adjusts how much reverb is applied to all

parts.

■

DSP System Chorus Send (Range: 000 to 127)

This parameter adjusts chorus.

NOTE

•Changing the tone, volume, pan pot, coarse tune, fine

tune, reverb send, or chorus send setting causes the

corresponding MIDI message to be output from the MIDI

terminal.

•Changing the tone settings changes the tone, octave

shift, reverb send, chorus send, and DSP line* parameter

settings.

*When DSP is off (See the note on page E-82).

•Turning on the Mixer’s DSP Line parameter (on this

page) causes the settings of the DSP Pan, DSP System

Reverb Send, and DSP System Chorus parameters to

be used in place of the Pan Pot, Reverb Send, and

Chorus Send parameters.

DSP L i n e

Cho Send

WK3000_e_47-58.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM50

E-51

The Synthesizer Mode of this keyboard provides the tools

for creating your own original tones. Simply select one of the

built-in tones and change its parameters to create your own

original sound. You can even store your sounds in memory

and select it using the same procedure as that used to select a

preset tone.

Synthesizer Mode Functions

The following describes how to use each of the functions

available in the Synthesizer Mode.

Synthesizer Mode Parameters

The preset tones that are built into this keyboard consist of a

number of parameters. To create a user tone, you first recall a

advanced tone (000 to 299) or a preset tone (300 to 499) and

then change its parameters to change it to your own tone.

Note that drum set tones (500 through 515) cannot be used

as the basis of a user tone.

The illustration nearby shows the parameters that make up

the preset tones and what each parameter does. As can be

seen in the illustration, parameters can be divided into four

groups, each of which is described in detail below.

NOTE

•Note that the tone whose parameter you can edit is the

one assigned to the channel (1 through 4) that is currently

selected with the Synthesizer Mode.

Synthesizer Mode

Volume Characteristic

Parameters

쎲Attack Time

쎲Release Time

쎲Cutoff Frequency

쎲Resonance

Tone Pitch Parameters

쎲Vibrato Type

쎲Vibrato Delay

쎲Vibrato Rate

쎲Vibrato Depth

쎲Octave Shift

Tone Characteristic

Setting Parameters

쎲Level

쎲Touch Sense

쎲Reverb Send

쎲Chorus Send

쎲DSP Line

쎲DSP Type

쎲DSP Parameter

Output

Tone Characteristic

Waveform

Tone Setting

(1) Tone Characteristic Waveform

■

Tone Setting

Specifies which of the preset tones should be used as the

original tone.

(2) Volume Characteristic Parameters

These parameters control how the tone changes over time,

from when the keyboard key is pressed until the tone decays.

You can specify changes in volume and sound characteristics.

■

Attack time

This is the rate or time it takes for the tone to reach its highest

volume level. You can specify a fast rate, where the tone

reaches its highest volume level immediately, a slow rate

where it gradually rises, or something in between.

■

Release time

This is the rate or time it takes for the tone volume to fall to

zero. You can specify a release that ranges from a sudden fall

to zero, to one that gradually falls to zero.

■

Cutoff Frequency

The cutoff frequency is a parameter for adjusting timbre by

cutting any frequency that is higher than a specific frequency.

A larger cutoff frequency produces a brighter (harder) timbre,

while a smaller frequency produces a darker (softer) timbre.

Time

Note ends

Key pressed

A R

Key released

Envelope

A: Attack time

R: Release time

Level

Cutoff frequenc

Frequency

735A-E-053A

WK3000_e_47-58.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM51

E-52

■

Resonance

Resonance enhances the harmonic components in the vicinity

of the cutoff frequency, which creates a distinctive sound. A

larger resonance value enhances the sound as shown in the

figure.

NOTE

•With some tones, a large resonance value can cause

distortion or noise during the attack part of the tone.

(3) Tone Pitch Parameters

■

Vibrato Type, Vibrato Delay, Vibrato Rate, Vibrato

Depth

These parameters adjust the vibrato effect, which causes

periodic changes in the tone.

■

Octave Shift

This parameter controls the octave of all tones.

(4) Tone Characteristic Setting Parameters

■

Level

This parameter controls the overall volume of the tone.

■

Touch Sense

This parameter controls changes in volume and timbre in

accordance with the relative amount of pressure applied to

the keyboard keys. You can specify more volume for stronger

pressure and less volume or a lighter pressure, or you can specify

the same volume regardless of how much pressure is applied to

the keys.

■

Reverb Send, Chorus Send, DSP Line , DSP Type, DSP

Parameter

These parameters control the effects applied to tones.

Level

Cut off frequency

Small Value

Resonance

Large Value

Frequency

Synthesizer Mode

735A-E-054A

WK3000_e_47-58.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM52

E-53

Saving User Tones

The group of tone numbers from 600 through 699 (User 001 through User 100) is called the “user area” because they are reserved for

storage of user tones. After you recall a preset tone and change its parameters to create your own user tone, you can store it in the user

area for later recall. You can recall your tones using the same procedure that you use when selecting a preset tone.

*1: You can select any Advance Tone, preset tone, or user tone. User tone areas 600 through 699 initially contain the same data as

DSP types 000 through 099.

*2: Area where data transferred from computer is stored (see “Using the Data Downloard Service” on page E-91). After transfer,

you can use the keyboard to edit parameters, but you can only overwrite existing parameters. You cannot save the data to

another number. Initially, nothing is stored in the user tone with wave memory area.

*3: Area where data transferred from computer is stored (see “Using the Data Downloard Service” on page E-91). Transfer only

is allowed, and no parameter editing is allowed. Initially, nothing is stored in the user drum set with wave memory area.

*4: User tones created by modifying parameters of one of the preset tones (000 to 049). User drawbar organ tone areas initially

contain two sets of the same data as drawbar organ tones types 000 through 049.

NOTE

•You can create an original tone using a user tone that includes a waveform (tone number 700 to 719). In this case, the

storage area is the same as the source tone area. For example, an original tone created using tone number 700 as a source

tone is stored in user area number 700.

Number Tone Type

000-299 Advanced Tones

300-499 Preset Tones

000-049 Preset Tones

100-199 User Tones*4

500-515 Drum Sets Source Tone Select Parameter Edit

Save As Original Tone

600-699 User Tones*1

700-719 User Tones with Waves*2

800-803 User Drum Sets with Waves*3

600-699 User Area

Standard Tone

Drawbar Organ Tones

Synthesizer Mode

735A-E-055A

WK3000_e_47-58.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM53

E-54

Creating a User Tone

Use the following procedure to select a preset tone and change

its parameters to create a user tone.

First, select the preset tone you want to use as a

basis for your user tone.

Press the SYNTH button.

•This enters the Synthesizer Mode, which is indicated

by the pointer next to SYNTH on the display screen.

Use [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to display the

parameter whose setting you want to change.

•Each press of [왗] or [왘] CURSOR button changes to

the next parameter. See “Parameters and Their

Settings” on this page for information on setting range

for each parameter.

Use [+] and [–] to change the setting of the currently

selected parameter.

•You can also use the number buttons to input a value

to change a parameter setting. See “Parameters and

Their Settings” on this page for information on setting

range for each parameter.

After you are finished editing the sound, press the

SYNTH button to exit the Synthesizer Mode.

NOTE

•See “Storing a User Tone In Memory” on page E-57 for

details on saving user tone data to memory so it is not

deleted.

Synthesizer Mode

735A-E-056B

Atk Time

Currently selected parameter

Parameter setting value

V i bDe l a

Parameters and Their Settings

The following describes the function of each parameter and

provides its setting range.

■

Attack Time (Range: –64 to 00 to +63)

Time it takes before the tone sounds after a key is pressed

■

Release Time (Range: –64 to 00 to +63)

Time the tone continues to sound after a key is released

■

Cutoff Frequency

(Range: –64 to 00 to +63)

High-band cutoff for the harmonic components of the tone

■

Resonance (Range: –64 to 00 to +63)

Resonance of the tone

Atk Time

Re l . T ime

C-of fFr

Resonan

SYNTH CURSOR

[+]/[–]

MODULATION button lamp

●WK-3000

WK3000_e_47-58.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM54

E-55

Synthesizer Mode

735A-E-057B

Value Meaning

oFF Off

vib Control Change 01h (Modulation)

dp0 Control Change 16

(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 0.)

dp1 Control Change 17

(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 1.)

dp2 Control Change 18

(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 2.)

dp3 Control Change 19

(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 3.)

dp4 Control Change 80

(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 4.)

dp5 Control Change 81

(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 5.)

dp6 Control Change 82

(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 6.)

dp7 Control Change 83

(Normally assigned to DSP Parameter 7.)

Modulat.

■

Modulation Assign (Range: *)

The Modulation Assign parameter specifies which

parameters should be affected when you use the keyboard’s

modulation function. Select “oFF” for any parameters that

you do not want affected by the modulation function.

NOTE

•If the Modulation Assign setting of a tone is any setting

from dp0 through dp7, that setting is ignored when the

tone is used as a layered or split tone. DSP parameter

effects are applied to the main tone only.

■

Modulation Depth (Range: 0 to 127) (WK-3000 only)

On the WK-3000, this parameter controls the modulation

value when the MODULATION button is pressed. How the

MODULATION button functions depends on the modulation

assign parameter setting as described below.

If this setting is

selected for

modulation assign:

vib

dp0 through dp7

Modulation is applied like this:

Modulation is applied to the depth specified

by the value assigned to the Modulation

Depth parameter as long as the

MODULATION button is depressed.

Releasing the MODULATION button causes

the modulation value to return to the initial

default value for the tone being used.

Each press of the MODULATION button

toggles modulation between the value

assigned to the Modulation Depth Parameter

and the initial default value for the tone being

used.

MODULATION Button Lamp

The MODULATION button lamp lights when the current

modulation depth is at its greatest possible setting. This can

occur either when the MODULATION button is depressed

or released, depending on the current Modulation Depth

parameter setting and the initial default modulation depth

value of the tone you are currently using.

ModDe t h

WK3000_e_47-58.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM55

E-56

■

Vibrato Waveform (Range: See below.)

Specifies the vibrato waveform.

■

Vibrato Delay (Range: –64 to 00 to +63)

Specifies the amount of time before vibrato starts.

■

Vibrato Rate (Range: –64 to 00 to +63)

Rate (speed) of the vibrato effect

■

Vibrato Depth (Range: –64 to 00 to +63)

Depth of the vibrato effect

■

Octave Shift (Range: –2 to 0 to +2)

Up/down octave shift

■

Level (Range: 000 to 127)

This parameter controls the overall volume of the tone. The

greater the value, the greater the volume. Setting a level of

zero means that the tone does not sound at all.

Vib.T

Value Meaning Waveform

Sin Sine Wave

tri Triangle Wave

SAU Sawtooth Wave

Sqr Square Wave

V i bDe l a

Vib.R eat

VibD te

Oc t Sh i f t

Leve l

Synthesizer Mode

735A-E-058A

■

Touch Sensitivity (Range: –64 to 00 to +63)

This parameter controls changes in the volume of the tone in

accordance with the pressure applied to the keyboard keys. A

greater positive value increases the volume of the output as

pressure increases, while a negative value decreases volume

with increased keyboard pressure. A setting of zero specifies

no change in output volume in accordance with keyboard

pressure.

■

Reverb Send (Range: 000 to 127)

This parameter adjusts reverb.

■

Chorus Send (Range: 000 to 127)

This parameter adjusts chorus.

■

DSP Line (Settings: on, oFF)

This parameter controls whether or not the DSP effect is used.

TchSe ens

Rvb Send

Cho Send

DSP L i n e

WK3000_e_47-58.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM56

E-57

Synthesizer Mode

735A-E-059B

DSP Settings

Use the DSP editing screen to select the DSP type and to edit

parameters.

Select a tone, press the SYNTH button, and then

configure parameter settings.

After everything is the way you want, press the [왔]

CURSOR button once.

•This advances to the DSP parameter editing screen.

•Pressing the [왖] CURSOR button returns to the

Synthesizer Mode parameter screen.

This setting specifies DSP parameters. See “DSP Parameters”

on page E-33, “Effect List” on page A-17, and “DSP Algorithm

List” on page A-19 for more information.

NOTE

•If you store an original tone with the DSP line turned on

(page E-56), simply recalling the tone automatically

changes the DSP line, DSP type, and DSP parameter

settings. This simplifies the recall of original tones that

include a DSP effect.

User Tone Creation Hints

The following hints provide helpful advice on making user

tone creation a bit quicker and easier.

Use a preset tone that is similar to the one you are trying to

create.

Whenever you already have a rough idea of the tone you are

trying to create, it is always a good idea to start with a preset

tone that is similar.

■

Experiment with various different settings.

There are no real rules about what a tone should sound like.

Let your imagination run free and experiment with different

combinations. You may be surprised at what you can achieve.

Storing a User Tone In Memory

The following procedure shows how to store a user tone in

memory. Once a tone is stored, you can call it up just as you

do with a preset tone.

To name a user tone and store it in

memory

Select a preset tone to use as the basis for the user

tone, press the SYNTH button to enter the

Synthesizer Mode, and make the parameter settings

you want.

After making parameter settings to create the user

tone, press [왔] CURSOR button twice.

Use [+] and [–] to change the user area tone number

on the display until the one where you want to

store the tone is shown.

•You can select any tone number from 600 to 699.

After the tone name is the way you want, press the

[왘] CURSOR button to store the tone.

•Use the [+] and [–] buttons to scroll through letters at

the current cursor location.

•Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to move the

cursor left and right.

•See the page E-103 for information about inputting

text.

SYNTH CURSOR

[+]/[–]

WK3000_e_47-58.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM57

E-58

Press [왔] CURSOR button to save the user tone.

•This will display a confirmation message asking

whether you really want to save the data. Press the

YES button to save the data.

•The message “Complete” appears momentarily on the

display, followed by the tone or rhythm selection

screen.

•To abort the save operation at any time, press the

SYNTH button or the EXIT button to exit the

Synthesizer Mode. Pressing the SYNTH button again

(before selecting another tone) returns to the

Synthesizer Mode with all of your parameter settings

still in place.

Synthesizer Mode

735A-E-060B

CURSOR

WK3000_e_47-58.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM58

E-59

Registration Memory Features

Registration memory lets you store up to 32 keyboard setups

(4 sets x 8 banks) for instant recall whenever you need them.

The following is a list of settings that are saved in registration

memory.

Registration Memory Settings

•Tone

•Rhythm

•Tempo

•Layer on/off

•Split on/off

•Split point

•Auto Harmonize on/off

•Mixer settings (Channels 1 to 10)

•Effect settings

•Touch Response settings

•Assignable jack setting

•Transpose

•Tuning

•Accompaniment volume setting

•Pitch bend range

•Auto Harmonize type

•MODE button setting

•Synchro standby state

•Mixer Hold

•DSP Hold

•Synthesizer Mode parameters (Modulation Assign,

Modulation Depth, Vibrato Waveform, Vibrato Delay,

Vibrato Rate, and Vibrato Depth only)

NOTE

•Each bank of registration memory initially contains data

when you first use the keyboard. Simple replace the

existing data with your own data.

•Registration memory functions are disabled while you

are using the SMF Player, Song Memory or demo tune

function.

•Registration memory functions are also disabled while

you are using the floppy disk drive (WK-3500 only) or

card slot (page E-94).

Registration Memory

Setup Names

You can assign setups into one of 32 areas, which you can

select using BANK buttons 1 through 4 and the four

REGISTRATION buttons. Area names range from 1-1 through

8-4 as shown below.

1Use the BANK button to select the bank. Each press of

BANK cycles through the bank numbers from 1 to 8.

2Pressing one of the REGISTRATION buttons (1 to 4) selects

the corresponding area in the currently selected bank.

NOTE

•Whenever you save a setup and assign it a setup name,

any setup data previously assigned to that name is

replaced with the new data.

•You can use the keyboard’s MIDI capabilities to save

your setup data to a computer or other external storage

device. See “Using the Data Download Service” on page

E-91 for details.

•You can save setup data to external media, if you want.

See “Saving Data” on page E-92 for more information.

1-1BANK 1 1-2 1-3 1-4

2-1BANK 2 2-2 2-3 2-4

4-1BANK 4 4-2 4-3 4-4

5-4

3-1BANK 3 3-2 3-3

6-1BANK 6 6-2 6-3 6-4

5-1BANK 5 5-2 5-3

7-1BANK 7 7-2 7-3 7-4

8-1BANK 8 8-2 8-3 8-4

3-4

1234

735A-E-061B

WK3000_e_59-60.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM59

E-60

To Save a Setup in Registration

Memory

Select a tone and rhythm, and otherwise set up the

keyboard the way you want it.

•See “Registration Memory Settings” on page E-59 for

details on what data is stored in the registration

memory.

Use the BANK button or the number buttons to

select the bank you want.

•If you do not perform any operation for about five

seconds after pressing the BANK button, the display

returns to the contents in step 1, above.

•Bank 1 selected.

While holding down the STORE button, press a

REGISTRATION button (1 to 4).

•The following display appears when you press the 2

button.

Release the STORE and REGISTRATION buttons.

NOTE

•The setup is saved as soon as you press a

REGISTRATION button in step 3, above.

Registration Memory

Bank

Store

To Recall a Setup from

Registration Memory

Use the BANK button or the number buttons to

select the bank.

•If you do not perform any operation for about five

seconds after pressing the BANK button, the keyboard

automatically clears the registration memory recall

screen.

Press the REGISTRATION button (1 to 4) or number

buttons for the area whose setup you want to recall.

•The setup name along with the message “Recall”

appears on the display.

NOTE

•If you press a REGISTRATION button without using the

BANK button to select a bank first, the last bank number

selected is used.

Bank

Reca l l

735A-E-062A

Number buttons

BANK

STOREREGISTRATION

WK3000_e_59-60.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM60

E-61

735A-E-063A

Song Memory Function

This keyboard lets you record up to five separate songs in

song memory for later playback. There are two methods you

can use to record a song: real-time recording where you record

the notes as you play them on the keyboard, and step

recording where you input chords and notes one-by-one.

NOTE

•Layer and split cannot be used while standing by for

recording or while recording is being performed in the

Song Memory Mode. Also, layer and split are

automatically turned off whenever the keyboard goes

into record standby or starts recording.

Tracks

Keyboard song memory records and plays back much like a

standard tape recorder. There are a total of six tracks, each of

which can be recorded separately. Besides notes, each track

can have its own tone number. Then when you play back the

tracks together, it sounds like an entire six-piece band. During

playback, you can adjust the tempo to change the speed of

playback.

Track 1

Start End

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Auto accompaniment (Rhythm,

Bass, Chord 1/2/3), Keyboard play

Keyboard play

Melody data recorded in track.

NOTE

•With this keyboard, Track 1 is the basic track, which

can be used to record keyboard play, along with Auto

Accompaniment. Tracks 2 through 6 can be used for

keyboard play, so they are called melody tracks. Tracks

2 through 6 are used to add other parts to what is

recorded in Track 1.

•Note that each track is independent of the others. This

means that even if you make a mistake while recording,

you only need to re-record the track where the mistake

was made.

•You can use different Mixer settings for each track (page

E-47).

Track 1 Track 5

Track 3

Track 6

Track 4

Track 2

Selecting a Track

Use the SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons marked CHORD/

TR1 through TR6 to select the track you want.

Song Memory Track Buttons

Basic Song Memory operations

The status of the Song Memory changes each time you press

the SONG MEMORY button.

Playback

Real-time Recording

Step Recording

Normal

Ste

Rec

Reco r d

Pla

Flash

WK3000_e_61-73.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM61

E-62

Song Memory Function

735A-E-064B

Using Real-time Recording

With real-time recording, the notes you play on the keyboard

are recorded as you play them.

To record with real-time recording

Press the SONG MEMORY button twice to enter

real-time record standby.

•Perform step 2, below, within five seconds after

entering record standby.

•The level meters for tracks 11 through 16 are shown

on the display while the keyboard is in record standby,

so you can easily check which tracks are already

recorded. See “Level Meter Contents During Record/

Edit Standby” on page E-69 for details.

Use the number buttons to select a song number

(0 to 4).

•The above song number screen remains on the display

for about five seconds.

Make the following settings.

•Tone number

•Rhythm number

•Tempo

•MODE button

Press the START/STOP button to start recording.

•When recording starts, the REC indicator flashes on

the display. After a few moments the indicator stops

flashing, and remains on the display.

•Real-time recording without a rhythm starts. If you

want to record with a rhythm, press the INTRO/

ENDING 1/2 or VARIATION/FILL-IN 1/2.

Play something on the keyboard.

•You can also record Auto Accompaniment chords by

selecting the applicable mode with the MODE button.

•Optional pedal, pitch bend and modulation

operations are also recorded. See “Track 1 Contents

After Real-time Recording”.

Press the START/STOP button to end recording

when you are finish playing.

•If you make a mistake while recording, you can stop

the record operation and begin over again from step

1, or you can use the editing function (page E-70) to

make corrections.

NOTE

•Using real-time recording to record to a track that already

contains recorded data replaces the previous recording

with the new one.

Song number

Record

Number buttons

START/STOP

SONG MEMORY

WK3000_e_61-73.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM62

E-63

Song Memory Function

735A-E-065B

Track 1 Contents After Real-time

Recording

In addition to keyboard notes and accompaniment chords,

the following data is also recorded to Track 1 during real-

time recording. This data is applied whenever Track 1 is

played back.

•Tone number

•Rhythm number

•INTRO/ENDING 1 button, INTRO/ENDING 2 button,

VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 button, VARIATION/FILL-IN 2

button, SYNCRHO/FILL-IN NEXT button operations

•Pedal operations (option)

The following data is recorded in the header whenever you

start a recording of a track.

•Mixer settings of other tracks

•Effect type

•Accompaniment volume

•Reverb Level

•Chorus Level

•DSP Hold On/Off

•Mixer Hold On/Off

•Pitch bend wheel operation

•Modulation wheel operation (WK-3500)

•Modulation button operation (WK-3000)

•Pitch bend range

Mixer Mode Settings

Channel 1 Mixer parameters (page E-47) are automatically

recorded to Track 1. You can use the Mixer to change each of

the parameters.

Memory Capacity

The keyboard has memory for approximately 10,000 notes.

•The measure number and note number flash on the display

whenever remaining memory is less than 100 notes.

•Recording automatically stops (and auto-accompaniment

and rhythm stops playing if they are being used) whenever

memory becomes full.

•Initially, nothing is stored in song memory.

Memory Data Storage

•Whenever you make a new recording, anything previously

stored in memory is replaced.

•Turning off the keyboard while a record operation is in

progress causes the contents of the track your are currently

recording to be lost.

•You can save memory data to external media, if you want.

See “Saving Data” on page E-92 for more information.

•Remember that you can dump memory contents to another

MIDI device using the procedure described under “Using

the Data Download Service” on page E-91.

Track 1 Real-time Recording

Variations

The following describes a number of different variations you

can use when recording to Track 1 using real-time recording.

All of these variations are based upon the procedure described

under “To record with real-time recording” on page E-62.

To start recording with synchro start

In place of step 4, press the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT

button. Auto-accompaniment and recording will both start

when you play a chord on the accompaniment keyboard.

To record using an intro, ending, or fill-in

During recording, the INTRO/ENDING 1/2, SYNCHRO/

FILL-IN NEXT, and VARIATION/FILL-IN 1/2 buttons

(pages E-43 to 44) can all be used as they normally are.

To synchro start Auto Accompaniment with an intro

pattern

In place of step 4, press the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button

and then INTRO/ENDING 1 or INTRO/ENDING 2 button.

Auto-accompaniment will start with the intro pattern when

you play a chord on the accompaniment keyboard.

To start Auto Accompaniment part way into a recording

In place of step 4, press the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button

and then play something on the melody keyboard to start

recording without Auto Accompaniment. When you reach

the point where you want accompaniment to start, play a

chord on the accompaniment keyboard to start Auto

Accompaniment.

WK3000_e_61-73.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM63

E-64

Song Memory Function

735A-E-066A

Playing Back from Song Memory

Once you record tracks to song memory, you can play them

back to see what they sound like.

To play back from song memory

Use the SONG MEMORY button to enter playback

standby, and then use the number buttons to select

a song number (0 to 4).

•The above song number screen remains on the display

for about five seconds. If it disappears before you have

a chance to select a song number, use the [왔] CURSOR

button to re-display it.

Press the START/STOP button to playback the song

you selected.

•You can use the TEMPO buttons to adjust the playback

tempo.

•Press the START/STOP button again to stop playback.

NOTE

•You can play along on the keyboard using layer (page

E-74) and split (page E-75) during playback.

•Pressing the START/STOP button to start playback from

song memory always starts from the beginning of the

song.

•The entire keyboard functions as a melody keyboard,

regardless of the MODE button setting.

To turn off a specific track

Press the SONG MEMORY TRACK button of the track you

want to turn off, or use the Mixer (Page E-47) to turn off the

channel of the track.

Pla

Playback standbySong number

Recording Melody and Chords

with Step Recording

With step recording, you can record Auto-Accompaniment

chords and notes, and even specify note lengths one by one.

Even those who find it difficult to play along on the keyboard

with an Auto-Accompaniment can create Auto-

Accompaniments based on their own original chord

progressions. The following shows the type of data that can

be recorded in Tracks 1 through 6.

Track 1: Chords and Auto-Accompaniment

Tracks 2 through 6: Keyboard play

With step recording, first record the chords and Auto-

Accompaniment in Track 1. Next, record the melody in Tracks

2 through 6.

NOTE

•Use the procedure under “To record to Tracks 2 through

6 using step recording” on page E-68 for details on how

to record to Tracks 2 through 6.

Number buttons

SONG MEMORY

START/STOP SONG MEMORY TRACK

SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT

WK3000_e_61-73.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM64

E-65

Song Memory Function

735A-E-067B

To record chords with step recording

Press the SONG MEMORY button three times to

enter step recording standby, and then use the

number buttons to select the song number (0 to 4).

Make the following settings.

•Rhythm number

•MODE button

Press the CHORD/TR1 button, which is one of the

SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons, to select Track1.

•When recording starts, the REC indicator flashes on

the display. After a few moments the indicator stops

flashing, and remains on the display.

Press the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button.

Play a chord.

•Use the chord play method that is specified by the

current MODE button setting (Fingered, CASIO

Chord, etc.).

•When the MODE button is set to Normal, specify the

chord using the root input keyboard and chord type

input keyboard. See “Specifying Chords in the

Normal Mode” on page E-66 for details.

* 96 clocks = 1 beat

Input the length of the chord (how long it should

be played until the next chord is played).

•Use the number buttons to specify the length of the

chord. See “Specifying the Length of a Note” on page

E-66 for details.

•The specified chord and its length are stored in

memory and the keyboard stands by for input of the

next chord.

•Repeat steps 5 and 6 to input more chords.

Flash

Ste

Rec

Cho r d

Cord name Measure, beat, and clock at

current location*

After you are finished recording, press the START/

STOP button.

•This enters playback standby for the song you have

just recorded.

•To play back the song at this time, press the START/

STOP button.

NOTE

•Use the procedure under “Correcting Mistakes While

Step Recording” on page E-69 to correct input mistakes

you make during step recording.

•You can add on to a track that already contains recorded

data by selecting that track in step 3 of the above

procedure. Doing so automatically locates the step

recording start point at the first beat immediately

following the previously recorded data.

•Inputting “0” as the chord length in steps 5 and 6 of the

above procedure specifies a rest, but the rest is not

reflected in the accompaniment contents when the

accompaniment is played.

Track 1 Contents After Step

Recording

In addition to chords, the following data is also recorded to

Track 1 during step recording. This data is applied whenever

Track 1 is played back.

•Rhythm number

•INTRO/ENDING 1 button, INTRO/ENDING 2 button,

VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 button, VARIATION/FILL-IN 2

button, SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button operations

NOTE

•You can also use number buttons 1 through 7, and button

9 to specify the button release timing for the VARIATION/

FILL-IN 1, VARIATION/FILL-IN 2, and SYNCHRO/FILL-

IN buttons. For more information, see “Specifying the

Length of a Note” on page E-66. Specifying release

timing specifies that the applicable button remains

depressed for a particular amount of time. If you do not

specify the release timing, it is assumed that the button

is pressed and then immediately released.

WK3000_e_61-73.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM65

E-66

Specifying Chords in the Normal

Mode

When the MODE button is set to Normal during step

recording, you can specify chords using a method that is

different from CASIO Chord and Fingered fingerings. This

chord specification method can be used to input 18 different

chord types using only two keyboard keys, so chords can be

specified even if you don’t know how to actually play them.

1Major

2Minor

3Augmented

4Diminished

5Suspended four

6Seventh

7Minor seventh

8Major seventh

9Minor major seventh

Root input keyboard Chord type input

keyboard

0Seventh flat five

AMinor seventh flat five

BSeventh suspended four

CDiminished seventh

DMinor add ninth

EAdd ninth

FMinor sixth

GSixth

HSix ninth

Song Memory Function

To specify a chord, hold down the key on the root input

keyboard that specifies the root, and press the key in the chord

type input keyboard to specify the chord type. When

inputting a chord with a specified bass note, pressing two

keys of the root input keyboard causes the lower note to be

specified as a bass note.

Example 1: To input Gm7, hold down G on the root input

keyboard and press the m7 key on the chord type

input keyboard.

Hold down key to specify chord

root.

Press key to specify chord

type

(G) (m7)

Example 2: To input Gm/C, hold down C and G on the root

input keyboard and press the m key on the chord

type input keyboard.

Hold down key to specify on bass

and chord root.

Press key to specify

chord type.

(G)(C) (m)

Specifying the Length of a Note

During step recording, the number buttons are used to specify

the length of each note.

Note lengths

Use number buttons [1] through [6] to specify whole notes

(), half notes ( ), quarter notes ( ), eighth notes ( ), 16th

notes ( ), and 32nd notes ( ).

Example: To specify a quarter note ( ), press [3].

Dots ( ) and triplicates ( )

While holding down the [7] (dot) or [9] (triplicate), use buttons

[1] through [6] to input the lengths of the notes.

Example: To input a dotted eighth notes ( ), hold down [7]

and press [4].

Ties

Input the first and then the second note.

Example: To input , press [4] and then [8]. Next, press

[5]. This note will be tied to the next note you input

(16th note in this example).

Rest

Hold down [0] and then use number buttons [1] through [9]

to specify the length of the rest.

Example: To input an eighth note rest, hold down [0] and press

[4].

•Pressing the [왘] CURSOR button inputs rests up to the

beginning of the next measure.

Track 1 Step Recording Variations

The following describes a number of different variations you

can use when recording to Track 1 using step recording. All

of these variations are based upon the procedure described

under “To record chords with step recording” on page E-65.

To start accompaniment with an intro pattern

In step 4, press INTRO/ENDING 1 or INTRO/ENDING 2

button after the SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button.

To switch to a rhythm variation

In step 5, press VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 or VARIATION/

FILL-IN 2 button immediately before inputting the chord.

To insert a fill in

In step 5, press VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 or VARIATION/

FILL-IN 2 button at the measure or beat immediately before

the chord or beat where you want to insert the fill in.

To insert an ending

In step 5, press INTRO/ENDING 1 or INTRO/ENDING 2

button at the measure or beat immediately before the chord

where you want to insert the ending.

735A-E-068B

WK3000_e_61-73.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM66

E-67

Song Memory Function

To record to Tracks 2 through 6 using

real-time recording

You can record to Tracks 2 through 6 while playing back what

you originally recorded on Track 1 and any other tracks that

are already recorded.

Press the SONG MEMORY button twice to enter

record standby, and then use the number buttons

to select a song number (0 to 4).

•The song number you select should be the one where

you previously input Track 1.

Use the SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons to select

the track you want to record to (2 through 6).

•While the keyboard is in record standby, the display

shows the level meters for channels 11 through 16, so

you can check which tracks have already been

recorded. See “Level Meter Contents During Record/

Edit Standby” on page E-69 for details.

Make the following settings.

•Tone number

•Tempo

Press the START/STOP button to start recording.

•At this time, the contents of any tracks that are already

recorded start to play back.

•Optional pedal, pitch bend and modulation

operations are also recorded.

Use the keyboard to play what you want to record

the track you selected.

Press the START/STOP button to end recording

when you are finished.

IMPORTANT!

•The length of the ending depends on the rhythm you

are using. Check the length of the pattern you are using

and set the length of the chord accordingly in step 6.

Making the chord too short in step 6 can result in the

ending pattern being cut off.

To step record chords without rhythm

Skip step 4. The specified chord of the length specified by

the number buttons is recorded. A rest can be specified here,

so an original chord pattern can be created.

To add chord accompaniment part way through rhythm

play

In place of step 4 at the start of the recording, press

VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 or VARIATION/FILL-IN 2 button

and input rests. Then in step 5, input the chords. Only rhythm

is played where you input the rests, and then chord play starts

after the rests.

Recording Multiple Tracks

Track 1 of the keyboard’s song memory records Auto

Accompaniment and keyboard play. In addition, there are

five other melody tracks that you can use to record melody

parts only. You can record different tones to the melody tracks

and build a full ensemble of instruments for your recordings.

The procedure you use for recording to Tracks 2 through 6 is

identical to the one you use when recording to Track 1.

735A-E-069B

Number buttons

SONG MEMORY

START/STOP SONG MEMORY TRACK

WK3000_e_61-73.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM67

E-68

Song Memory Function

Track Contents After Real-time

Recording

In addition to keyboard notes, the following data is also

recorded to the selected track during real-time recording. This

data is applied whenever the track is played back.

•Tone number

•Pedal operations (option)

The following data is recorded in the header whenever you

start a recording of a track.

•Mixer settings of other tracks

•Effect type

•Accompaniment volume

•Reverb Level

•Chorus Level

•DSP Hold On/Off

•Mixer Hold On/Off

•Pitch bend wheel operation

•Modulation wheel operation (WK-3500)

•Modulation button operation (WK-3000)

•Pitch bend range

To record to Tracks 2 through 6 using

step recording

This procedure describes how to input notes one-by-one,

specifying each note’s pitch and length.

Press the SONG MEMORY button three times to

enter real-time record standby, and then use the

number buttons to select a song number (0 to 4).

•The song number you select should be the one where

you previously input Track 1.

Ste

Rec

Flash

Use the SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons to select

the track you want to record to (2 through 6).

Example: Select Track 2.

Specify a tone number.

•Pressing a TONE button or the DRAWBAR ORGAN

button displays the tone number and name on the

display. You can then use the number buttons, or the

[+] (increase) and [–] (decrease) buttons to change the

tone.

•After changing the tone number, press any keyboard

key to clear the tone number and name screen, and

return to the note input screen.

Use the keyboard keys to input notes, or the [0]

button to input rests.

•At this time, the display shows the keyboard pressure

(velocity). Use the [+] (increase) and [–] (decrease)

buttons to change the velocity.

•You can also input a chord.

Use the number buttons to input the length of the

note or rest (page E-66).

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to input more notes.

Press the START/STOP button to end recording

when you are finished.

735A-E-070B

Number buttons

SONG MEMORY

START/STOP SONG MEMORY TRACK

CURSOR

WK3000_e_61-73.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM68

E-69

NOTE

• Use the procedure under “Correcting Mistakes While

Step Recording” on this page to correct input mistakes

you make during step recording.

• You can add on to a track that already contains recorded

data by selecting that track in step 2 of the above

procedure. Doing so automatically locates the step

recording start point at the first beat immediately

following the previously recorded data.

• Whenever you are recording to Tracks 2 through 6, the

entire keyboard functions as a melody keyboard,

regardless of the current MODE button setting.

Track Contents After Step Recording

In addition to notes and rests, the following data is also

recorded to the track during step recording. This data is

applied whenever the track is played back.

• Tone number

Level Meter Contents During Record/

Edit Standby

Channels 11 through 16 correspond to Tracks 1 through 6.

Whenever the keyboard is in record or edit (page E-70)

standby, the level meter display shows which tracks already

contain recorded data and which are still empty. Tracks with

four lit segments already contained recorded data, while

tracks with one lit segment are not yet recorded.

Correcting Mistakes While Step

Recording

Memory data can be thought of as a musical score that

progresses from left to right, with the input point normally

at the far right of the recorded data.

The procedure described here lets you move the input point

to the left in order to make changes in data you have already

input. Note, however, that moving the input point to the left

and changing data automatically deletes all of the data

recorded to the right of the input point.

Song Memory Function

Recording track

Not recording track

To correct mistakes while step

recording

Without exiting step recording, use the [왗]

CURSOR button to move the input point to the left.

• The REC indicator disappears from the display, and

the STEP indicator flashes.

Monitoring the data on the display, use [왗] and

[왘] CURSOR buttons to move the input point to

the data you want to change.

Example: To re-record all note data following the note

A3 located at Measure 120, Beat 1, Clock 0.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button.

No t e C#4



••••••• •••••••



••••••• •••••••

C 4

C 4



Measure 126/Beat 3/Clock 48

(Normal input point)

Measure 126/Beat 3/Clock 0

(Previous data)

Use [왗] and [왘] CURSOR

to move left and ri

ht.

Press [왗] CURSOR button.

Data flowData flow

No t e A3



••••••• •••••••

C 4A3 

Measure 120/Beat 1/Clock 0

(Input point moved to using [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons)

Data flow

735A-E-071B

Rewr i t e?

WK3000_e_61-73.p65 03.6.11, 5:31 PM69

E-70

Song Memory Function

Press the YES button.

•This deletes all data from the location you specified

and enters step record standby.

•Pressing the [왖] CURSOR button or the NO button

cancels deleting the data.

NOTE

•When you reach the end of the recording by pressing

the [왘] CURSOR button, the “REC” indicator appears

and the “STEP” indicator flashes on the display,

indicating that you can add more data using step

recording.

To delete specific note data

Perform steps 1 and 2 under “To correct mistakes

while step recording” above to display the note you

want to delete.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button twice.

In response to the “Delete?” message that appears

on the screen, press the YES button to delete the

displayed note.



•••••••

Measure 120/Beat 1/Clock 0

(Step re-recording begins from here.)

Data flow

All data to

the right

is deleted.

Editing Memory Contents

After you record to keyboard memory, you can recall

individual notes and parameter settings (such as tone

number) and make any changes you want. This means you

can correct misplayed notes, make changes in tone selections,

etc.

The following types of data can be edited.

•Note intensity

•Notes

•Chords

•Tone numbers

•Rhythm number

•INTRO/ENDING 1 button, INTRO/ENDING 2 button,

VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 button, VARIATION/FILL-IN 2

button, SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT button operations

To edit memory contents

Press the SONG MEMORY button three times to

enter step recording standby, and then use the [+]

and [–] buttons to select a song number (0 to 4).

Use the SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons to select

the recorded track that you want to edit.

Press the [왗] CURSOR button to enter the editing

mode.

•The REC indicator disappears from the display, and

the STEP indicator flashes.

Flash

Ste

Rec

735A-E-072A

SONG MEMORY

START/STOP SONG MEMORY TRACK

CURSOR

[+]/[–]

YES/NO

WK3000_e_61-73.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM70

E-71

Song Memory Function

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to move to

the location in track where the note or parameter

you want to change is located.

Note editing example

Make any changes in the value that you want.

•The actual procedures you use to change a parameter

depend on the type of data it contains. See “Editing

Techniques and Display Contents” on this page for

details.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to edit other parameters.

Press the START/STOP button to end editing when

you are finished.

NOTE

•The only parameters that can be editted for Tracks 2

through 6 are notes and tone numbers.

•In the case of real-time recording, you later can change

tone numbers you specified while recording to Tracks 1

through 6 is in progress.

•You can only change tone numbers that were originally

set for Tracks 2 through 6 using step recording.

•In the case of real-time recording, you later can change

rhythm numbers you specified while recording to Track

1 is in progress.

•You can only change rhythm numbers that were originally

set for Track 1 using step recording.

•You cannot use the edit procedure to add more data to

a recording.

•You cannot move portions of a recording to a different

location within the recording.

•Note lengths cannot be changed.

No t e C4

PitchVelocity Parameter being

edited

Editing Techniques and Display

Contents

The following describes the editing techniques you can use

to change the various parameters stored in memory.

To change the key pressure (velocity) of a note

Use the number buttons or [+] and [–] to adjust the key

pressure.

To change the pitch of a note

Input a new note on the keyboard or use [+] and [–] buttons

to change the pitch of a note. The pitch you specify here is

reflected in the keyboard and the notes shown in the staff on

the display.

IMPORTANT!

•Whenever editing memory contents, never change a

note so it is identical to the note before or after it. Doing

so may alter the length of the changed note and the

note before or after it. Should this happen, you will have

to re-record the entire track.

To change a chord

Use the chord fingering method selected by the MODE button

(Fingered, CASIO Chord, etc.) to input a chord.

To change a tone number

Use the number buttons or [+] and [–] buttons to change a

tone number.

No t e G4

Cho r d

GrandPno

735A-E-073A

WK3000_e_61-73.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM71

E-72

Song Memory Function

NOTE

•In the case of real-time recording, you later can change

tone numbers you specified while recording to Tracks 1

through 6 is in progress.

•You can only change tone numbers that were originally

set for Tracks 2 through 6 using step recording.

To change a rhythm number

Use the number buttons or [+] and [–] buttons to change a

rhythm number.

NOTE

•In the case of real-time recording, you later can change

rhythm numbers you specified while recording to Track

1 is in progress.

•You can only change rhythm numbers that were originally

set for Track 1 using step recording.

To change a rhythm controller operation

*INTRO/ENDING 1 button, INTRO/ENDING 2 button,

VARIATION/FILL IN 1 button, VARIATION/FILL IN 2

button, SYNCHRO/FILL IN NEXT button operations

Press the rhythm controller button you want to change to.

Int /End1

Editing a Song

You can perform the following operations in the song editing

mode.

•Delete a song

•Delete a track

•Song header data rewrite (Panel Record)

To delete a song

Press the SONG MEMORY button once to enter

playback standby.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons to select the number of

the song you want to delete.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button. If there is no song

number on the display, press the [왔] CURSOR

button twice.

•This displays the song delete screen.

Press the YES button.

•This causes the message “Sure?” to appear, confirming

whether you really want to delete the song.

Press the YES button to delete the song and return

to playback standby.

735A-E-074A

SONG MEMORY

SONG MEMORY TRACK

CURSOR

[+]/[–]

YES/NO

WK3000_e_61-73.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM72

E-73

Song Memory Function

To delete a specific track

Press the SONG MEMORY button once to enter

playback standby.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons to select the number of

the song that contains the track you want to delete.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button twice. If there is no

song number on the display, press the [왔] CURSOR

button three times.

•This displays the song delete screen.

Use the SONG MEMORY TRACK buttons to select

the recorded track or tracks whose data you want

to delete.

Track delete standby

•You can specify more than one track for deletion by

pressing more than one track select button.

•To deselect a track, simply press its track select button

again.

Press the YES button.

•This causes the message “Sure?” to appear, confirming

whether you really want to delete the track.

Press the YES button to delete the track.

NOTE

•You cannot change the song number while in track delete

standby.

•Pressing the SONG MEMORY button while in track

delete standby returns to record standby.

Tr .Del .?

Number of the song that contains the track

(cannot be changed)

Track delete standby

Recorded track

Track being deleted (Multiple

tracks can be specified.)

To rewrite song header data (Panel

Record)

You can use a procedure called “Panel Record” to change the

initial Mixer, tempo and other settings stored in the song

header.

Press the SONG MEMORY button once to enter

playback standby.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons to select the number of

the song that contains the header data you want to

rewrite.

Make the changes you want to the header data.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button three times.

•This displays the song delete screen.

Press the YES button to rewrite the header data.

735A-E-075A

WK3000_e_61-73.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM73

E-74

Keyboard Settings

Press the LAYER button.

Select the layered tone.

Example: To select “360 FRENCH HORN GM” as the

layered tone, use the number buttons to in-

put 3, 6 and then 0.

Now try playing something on the keyboard.

•Both tones are played at the same time.

Press the LAYER button again to unlayer the tones

and return the keyboard to normal.

NOTE

•Turning on layering switches the currently selected part

from Part 1 to Part 2, and displays the layered tone. At

that time, you can use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons

to switch between parts. Turning off layering returns to

Part 1.

•The main tone sounds over Channel 1, while the layered

tone sounds over Channel 2. You can also use the Mixer

to change the tone and volume settings for these

channels.

•Note that layering is not possible during record standby

or recording in the Song Memory Mode, or while you

are using the SMF Player Mode.

Main Tone (BRASS GM) + Layered Tone (FRENCH HORN GM)

Fr .HornG

Parts

Up to four parts (numbered 1 through 4) can be used

simultaneously during keyboard play. These parts can be

used by the layer and split functions explained below.

Part 1: Main tone part

Part 2: Layered tone part

Part 3: Split tone part

Part 4: Layered and split tone part

Using Layer

Layer lets you assign two different tones (a main tone and a

layered tone) to the keyboard, both of which play whenever

you press a key. For example, you could layer the FRENCH

HORN GM tone on the BRASS GM tone to produce a rich

and brassy sound.

LAYER

To layer tones

First select the main tone.

Example: To select “361 BRASS GM” as the main tone,

press the TONE button and then use the num-

ber buttons to input 3, 6 and then 1.

735A-E-076A

Brass_G

St r in

Selected layer tone Lit

LAYERSPLIT

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM74

E-75

Main Tone (STRINGS 1)

Split point

Split Tone

(PIZZICATO GM)

Using Split

With split you can assign two different tones (a main tone

and a split tone) to either end of the keyboard, which lets

you play one tone with your left hand and another tone with

your right hand. For example, you could select STRINGS 1as

the main (high range) tone and PIZZICATO GM as the split

(low range) tone, putting an entire string ensemble at your

fingertips.

Split also lets you specify the split point, which is the loca-

tion on the keyboard where the changeover between the two

tones occurs.

NOTE

•Leave the MODE button in the Normal or FULL RANGE

CHORD position.

SPLIT

To split the keyboard

First select the main tone.

Example: To select “348 STRINGS 1” as the main tone,

press the TONE button and then use the

number buttons to input 3, 4 and then 8.

Press the SPLIT button.

Select the split tone.

Example: To select “345 PIZZICATO GM” as the split

tone, use the number buttons to input 3, 4 and

then 5.

St r in s1

Specify the split point. While holding down the

SPLIT button, press the keyboard key where you

want the leftmost key of the high end range to be.

Example: To specify G3 as the split point, press the G3

key.

Now try playing something on the keyboard.

•Every key from F3 and below is assigned the

PIZZICATO GM tone, while every key from G3 and

above is assigned the STRINGS 1 tone.

Press the SPLIT button again to unsplit the keyboard

and return it to normal.

NOTE

•Turning on split switches the currently selected part to

Part 3, and displays the split tone. At that time, you can

use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to switch between

parts. Turning off split returns to Part 1.

•The main tone sounds over Channel 1, while the split

tone sounds over Channel 3. You can also use the Mixer

to change the tone and volume settings for these

channels.

•Note that split is not possible during record standby or

recording in the Song Memory Mode, or while you are

using the SMF Player Mode.

•When the MODE button is set to CASIO CHORD or

FINGERED, the accompaniment keyboard range is in

accordance with the split point you specify with the above

procedure.

Pizz_G

Keyboard Settings

735A-E-077B

Aco .B _

Selected split tone Lit

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM75

E-76

To split the keyboard and then layer

tones

Press the TONE button and then input the tone

number of the main tone.

Example: To set “361 BRASS GM” as the main tone.

Press the SPLIT button and then input the number

of the split tone.

Example: To set “345 PIZZICATO GM” as the split tone.

•After specifying the split tone, press the SPLIT button

to unsplit the keyboard.

Press the LAYER button and then input the number

of the layered tone.

Example: To set “360 FRENCH HORN GM” as the

layered tone.

Press the SPLIT button or the LAYER button so both

of the SPLIT and LAYER indicators are displayed.

Split Tone (PIZZICATO GM)

Layered Split Tone

(STRINGS 1)

Main Tone (BRASS GM)

Layered Tone (FRENCH HORN GM)

Split point

Using Layer and Split Together

You can use layer and split together to create a layered split

keyboard. It makes no difference whether you layer tones

first and then split the keyboard, or split the keyboard and

then layer tones. When you use layer and split in combination,

the high range of the keyboard is assigned two tones (main

tone + layered tone), and the low range two tones (split tone

+ layered split tone).

LAYER SPLIT

Brass_G

735A-E-078A

Keyboard Settings

Pizz_G

Fr .HornG

LAYERSPLIT

[+]/[–]

TONE

TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM76

E-77

Trans.

735A-E-079B

Keyboard Settings

Transposing the Keyboard

Transpose lets you raise and lower the overall key of the

keyboard in semitone units. If you want to play an

accompaniment for a vocalist who sings in a key that’s

different from the keyboard, for example, simply use

transpose to change the key of the keyboard.

To transpose the keyboard

Press the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button.

•This causes a pointer to appear on the display next to

TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION, and displays the

transpose setting screen.

Use [+] and [–] to change the transpose setting of

the keyboard.

Example: To transpose the keyboard five semitones

upwards.

•Pressing the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button exits

the transpose screen.

NOTE

•The keyboard can be transposed within a range of –24

(two octave downwards) to +24 (two octave upwards).

•The transpose setting also affects playback from song

memory and Auto Accompaniment.

•The allowable pitch range you can transpose within

depends on the tone you are using. If a transpose

operation causes a note to be outside of the pitch range

for the tone being used, the keyboard automatically plays

the same note in the nearest octave that falls within the

pitch range of the tone you are using.

Input the number of the layered split tone.

Example: To specify the “348 STRINGS 1” tone, enter 3,

4, 8.

While holding down the SPLIT button, press the

keyboard key where you want the lowest note (the

leftmost key) of the upper range (right side range)

to be.

Play something on the keyboard.

•Press the LAYER button to unlayer the keyboard, and

the SPLIT button to unsplit it.

NOTE

•Turning on layer+split switches the currently selected

part to Part 4, and displays the layered tone. At that

time, you can use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to

switch between parts. Turning off layer returns to Part

3, while turning off split returns to part 2. Turning off

both layer and split returns to Part 1.

•The main tone sounds over Channel 1, the layer tone

over Channel 2, the split tone over Channel 3, and the

layer/split tone over Channel 4. You can also use the

Mixer to change the tone and volume settings for these

channels.

St r in s1

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM77

E-78

Tuning the Keyboard

The tuning feature lets you fine tune the keyboard to match

the tuning of another musical instrument.

To tune the keyboard

Press the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to display

the tuning screen.

Use [+] and [–] to change the tuning setting of the

keyboard.

Example: To lower the tuning by 20.

•Pressing the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button exits

the transpose screen.

NOTE

•The keyboard can be tuned within a range of –99 cents

to +99 cents.

*100 cents is equivalent to one semitone.

•The tuning setting also affects playback from song

memory and Auto Accompaniment.

Tune

735A-E-080B

Keyboard Settings

Using Touch Response

When touch response is turned on, the relative volume of

sound output by the keyboard is varied in accordance with

the amount of pressure applied, just like an acoustic piano.

To turn touch response on and off

Press the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button.

•This causes a pointer to appear on the display next to

TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to display

the touch response setting screen.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons to select the touch

response sensitivity level.

•“1” outputs powerful sound even with light key

pressure, while “3” requires very heavy key pressure

to output powerful sound.

•Pressing [+] and [–] at the same time returns

sensitivity to the “2” setting.

•When you select “oFF”, the tone does not change

regardless of how much pressure you apply to the

keyboard.

NOTE

•Touch response not only affects the keyboard’s internal

sound source, it also is output as MIDI data.

•Song Memory playback, accompaniment, and external

MIDI note data do not affect the touch response setting.

Touch

[+]/[–]

TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION CURSOR

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM78

E-79

Changing Other Settings

Setting Types

The table below shows the parameters whose settings you can change.

Setting menu

Transpose

(Trans.)

Auto Harmonize

(AutoHarm)

Touch Response

(Touch)

Tune

(Tune)

Display

(Contrast)

Pedal

(Jack)

Mixer Hold

(MixHold)

DSP Hold

(DSP Hold)

MIDI

(MIDI)

Delete/Initialize

(Del/Init)

Page

E-77

E-82

E-78

E-82

E-83

Description

Adjusts of overall keyboard tuning by semitone units.

Selects the Auto Harmonize Type

Specifies of how sound should change with keyboard pressure.

Fine adjustment of overall keyboard tuning.

Adjusts display brightness.

Assigns effects to pedals.

Turns mixer hold on or off.

Turn DSP hold on or off.

MIDI settings

Initializes all settings to initial factory defaults, resets specific settings or deletes user

rhythms.

735A-E-081B

Keyboard Settings

NOTE

•The above settings are all saved whenever you turn off the keyboard. For details, see “Memory Contents” on page E-18.

•MIDI settings and Delete/Initialize settings are disabled while you are using the SMF Player or Song Memory function.

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM79

E-80

To use the keyboard settings menu

Press the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button.

•This causes a pointer to appear on the display next to TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons, and the [왖] and [왔] CURSOR buttons to recall the items whose settings

you want to change.

735A-E-082A

Keyboard Settings

Tone selection screen

MIDI setting

Delete setting

Initialize

setting

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button

[왔][왖]

[왔]

[왖]

EXIT button

[왖] : [왖] CURSOR button

[왔] : [왔] CURSOR button

[왗] : [왗] CURSOR button

[왘] : [왘] CURSOR button

TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION

button

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM80

E-81

735A-E-083B

Use the [+] and [–] buttons or the number buttons to change the values.

•Settings you make are applied even if you do not press the EXIT button.

•See the following section titled “Setting Menu Items” for details on each setting.

•After making the settings you want, press the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button or EXIT button to return to the tone or

rhythm selection screen.

■

In case of a delete or initialize procedure

Press the YES button.

•This displays the user area number and data name of the data to be deleted.

•The data size value represents kilobyte units.

Now use the number buttons, or the [+] (increase) and [–] (decrease) buttons to select the data you want.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button.

•This causes the message “Sure?” to appear, confirming whether you really want to perform the delete or initialize operation.

Press the YES button to complete the operation.

•This performs the delete or initialize operation and returns to the step 5 screen.

After making the settings you want, press the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION button or EXIT button to return to the tone

or rhythm selection screen.

IMPORTANT!

•It can take more than one minute to perform a delete or initialize procedure after you pressing the YES button in step 7

above. The message “Pls Wait” will remain on the display to indicate that a procedure is being performed. Never try to

perform any operation while “Pls Wait” is displayed. Performing any operation can damage the keyboard’s memory and

cause it to malfunction.

Keyboard Settings

TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION CURSOR

Number buttons

[+]/[–]

YES/NO

EXIT

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM81

E-82

735A-E-084A

Keyboard Settings

Setting Menu Items

쏋 Auto Harmonize Types

You can select from among the 10 different types of auto harmonize listed below.

쏋 MIDI Setting

Description

Specifies the send channel for main tone play.

Specifies whether accompaniment range MIDI Note On messages

received from an external device should be interpreted as auto

accompaniment chords.

Specifies whether this keyboard’s auto accompaniment or song

memory is sent as MIDI messages.

Specifies whether the keyboard should sound the parts played on

it.

Specifies the maximum change in a tone that can be applied using

the PITCH BEND wheel. The setting range is 00 (no change) to 12

(12 semitones).

Setting menu

Keyboard Channel

(Keybd Ch)

MIDI In Chord Judge

(Chord)

Accomp/Song MIDI Out

(Ac/SgOut)

Local Control Setting

(Local)

Pitch Bend Range

(Bend)

Range

01 to 16

on/oFF

00 to 12

Default

oFF

Description

Adjusts display contrast.

Assigns the sustain pedal effect to a pedal.

Assigns the sostenuto pedal effect to a pedal.

Assigns the soft pedal effect to a pedal.

Assigns the START/STOP button function to a pedal.

When Mixer Hold is turned on, the parameters of accompaniment

parts (Part 6 through Part 10) cannot be modified by

accompaniment data.

on: Current DSP line setting is maintained, even when the tone is

changed.

oFF: Changing the tone switches to the DSP line setting of the new

tone.

Setting menu

Contrast

(Contrast)

Assignable Jack

(Jack)

Mixer Hold

(MixHold)

DSP Hold

(DSP Hold)

Range

00 to 15

SUS

SoS

SFt

rhy

on/oFF

Default

SUS

—

oFF

쏋 Other Settings

Type

(Parameter Name)

Duet1

Duet2

Country

Octave

5th

3-Way Open

3-Way Close

Strings

Block

Big Band

Description

Adds a 1-part harmony to keyboard play.

Adds a 1-part harmony to keyboard play. Duet2 harmony is more open than Duet1.

Adds a country-flavor harmony to keyboard play.

Adds notes one octave below notes played on the keyboard.

Adds fifth notes above notes played on the keyboard.

Adds two open harmony parts to notes played on the keyboard (creating three-part harmony).

Adds two close harmony parts to notes played on the keyboard (creating three-part harmony).

Adds harmony suitable for strings.

Adds block chord notes.

Adds harmony suitable for big band play.

No.

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM82

E-83

쏋 Delete/Initialize Settings

Description

Deletes selected SMF data.

Deletes selected user rhythm data.

Deletes selected user tone data.

Initializes parameters assigned by the Mixer or by input from an

external sequencer.

Initializes all parameters, except for the display contrast setting.

Initializes to initial factory defaults.

Deletes all data in the user area.

Setting menu

SMF Delete

User Rhythm Delete

User Tone Delete

Mixer Reset

(InitMix?)

Parameter Reset

(InitPar?)

System Reset

(InitSys?)

Range

—

Default

—

735A-E-085A

Keyboard Settings

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM83

E-84

Using the SMF Player

The letters “SMF” stand for Standard MIDI File, which is a file format that allows MIDI data to be shared between different

software and sequencers. There are actually three SMF formats, named SMF 0, SMF 1, and SMF 2. This keyboard supports the

SMF 0 format, which is the one that is most widely used today, and so all mentions of “SMF data” in this manual refer to SMF 0

format data.

SMF format music data can be stored in the keyboard’s built-in Flash memory. Data stored in Flash memory can be played back

using the SMF Player Mode. You can also load SMF data from a SmartMedia card or floppy diskette into the keyboard’s user area

and then play it back using the SMF Player Mode. The follow shows the maximum number of files that can be stored on each type

of media.

Flash Memory: 200 files*

SmartMedia Card: 255 files*

Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 only): 112 (2DD diskette)* or 224 (2HD diskette) files*

*Note that the number of files you can store in memory also depends on the size of each file. If your files are very large, you may

be able to store fewer than the number of files indicated above.

IMPORTANT!

•Note that CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. shall not be held liable for any loss of data stored in Flash memory, or on a

SmartMedia card or a floppy diskette (WK-3500 only).

735A-E-086B

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM84

E-85

SMF Player Mode Operational Flow

[

왗

], [

–

]

Select file name.

Select play along part.

Select playback mode.

Select music

Select output mode.

S 1

SMF Player indicator Lights

ABC1 Playback Mode + File Name

04 ABC 1 Part Number + File Name

Error (Other errors may also occur.)

Data is SMF but not SMF0

Data is not correct SMF

Err Not SMF0 SMF0 error appears

Err WrongDat Data error appears

01 Key Ch Part Number

04 Key Ch Part Number

16 Key Ch Part Number

S 1 PlayMode Playback Mode

S L PlayMode Playback Mode

A 1 PlayMode Playback Mode

A L PlayMode Playback Mode

int Output OUTPUT

out Output OUTPUT

S 1 ABC2 Playback Mode + File Name

S 1 ABC3 Playback Mode + File Name

[

왘

]*, [+]

[

왗

], [

–

][

왘

], [+]

[

왗

], [

–

][

왘

], [+]

[

왗

], [

–

][

왘

], [+]

[

왗

], [

–

][

왘

], [+]

[

왗

], [

–

][

왘

], [+]

[

왗

], [

–

][

왘

], [+]

[

왗

], [

–

][

왘

], [+]

Direct input using number buttons is also possible.

Select media.

EXIT button

[왖]

[왖

Tone/Rhythm Selection Screen

SMF PLAYER button

EXIT button

START/STOP button

EXIT button

EXIT button,

[왖][왔]

[왖]

[왔]

[왖]

[왔]

START/STOP button

Playback stopped.

START/STOP button, Playback complete.

[왖] : [왖] CURSOR button

[왔] : [왔] CURSOR button

[왗] : [왗] CURSOR button

[왘] : [왘] CURSOR button

Note

•

You can use the [

왘

[

왗

], [

–

] buttons to

control SMF play back.

735A-E-087A

Using the SMF Player

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM85

E-86

735A-E-088A

Using the SMF Player

Playing Back an SMF

Note that the first step you need to perform in the procedure

below depends on whether you are playing back from Flash

memory, a SmartMedia card, or a floppy diskette (WK-3500

only).

PREPARATION

•SmartMedia Card

•Insert the SmartMedia card that contains the data you

want to play into the keyboard’s card slot.

•Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)

•Insert the floppy diskette that contains the data you

want to play into the keyboard’s floppy disk drive.

IMPORTANT!

•Never remove the SmartMedia card from the card slot

or turn off the keyboard while card data is being accessed

by a save, read, or delete operation. Doing so can corrupt

the data on the SmartMedia card or even damage the

card slot.

•Before ejecting a diskette, always check to make sure

that the access lamp is not lit or flashing. A lit or flashing

access lamp means that the keyboard is performing a

data read or write operation. Ejecting a diskette while it

is being accessed can cause its data to become

corrupted.

Internal

To play back an SMF

Flash Memory

-1

Use the SMF PLAYER button to display the

“Internal” indicator in the text area of the screen.

•This causes the “SMF PLAYER” indicator to appear

on the display.

SmartMedia Card

-2

Insert the SmartMedia card that contains the file

you want to play into the keyboard’s card slot.

Use the SMF PLAYER button to display the “Card”

indicator in the text area of the screen.

•This causes the “SMF PLAYER” indicator to appear

on the display.

Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 only)

-3

Insert the floppy diskette that contains the file

you want to play into the keyboard’s floppy disk

drive. Use the SMF PLAYER button to display the

“Disk” indicator in the text area of the screen.

•This causes the “SMF PLAYER” indicator to appear

on the display.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to display the file

selection screen.

•SMFs are those shows file names end with the

extension “MID”. An error message appears at this

time if there are no SMF files currently in Flash

Memory.

What you should do first depends on whether you

are playing back from Flash memory, a memory

card, or a floppy diskette.

SMF PLAYER CURSOR

EXIT

START/STOPACCOMP VOLUME

Number buttons

[+]/[–]

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM86

E-87

Configuring Other Settings

To configure other settings

Select the file you want to play back.

•Perform steps 1 through 3 under “To play back an

SMF” to select a file.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to display a screen

for selecting the part you want to play on the

keyboard (play along part).

•Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons or the [+] and

[–] buttons to select the play along part.

•You can specify the part you want to play on the

keyboard (the play-along part) as a value in the range

of 1 through 16.

•After specifying a part, turn off the channel that

corresponds to the play-along part you selected. See

“Turning Channels On and Off” on page E-47 for more

information. Performing this step turns off the

applicable part so you can play it on the keyboard

along with the rest of the SMF playback.

NOTE

•Entering the SMF Player Mode initializes all parts by

turning on all Mixer Mode channels.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to display the

playback mode selection screen. Use the [왗] and

[왘] CURSOR buttons or the [+] and [–] buttons to

select the playback mode.

You can select from among the following four playback

modes.

S1 : One file, one time

SL : One file, repeat

A1 : All files, one time

AL : All files, repeat

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to display the output

mode selection screen.

•Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons or the [+] and

[–] buttons to select the output mode.

•You can select from among the following two output

types.

int : Keyboard’s built-in speakers

out : MIDI OUT

NOTE

•Layer, split, and Auto Harmonize are automatically turned

off in the SMF Player Mode.

735A-E-089B

Using the SMF Player

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons or the [+]

and [–] buttons to select the file you want to play.

•The name of the currently selected file appears in the

text area of the display. The playback mode is shown

in the number area of the display. The Tempo/

Measure area of the display shows the size of the file

in kilobytes.

Press the START/STOP button

•This starts playback of the selected file.

•The number area of the display shows the number of

the part to be played manually on the keyboard.

•You can use the TEMPO buttons to adjust the tempo

within the range of 30 to 255.

•You can turn channels 1 through 16 on and off,

regardless of whether file playback is in progress or

stopped. For more information, see “Turning

Channels On and Off” on page E-47.

To stop file playback, press the START/STOP button

again.

Adjusting SMF Playback Volume

The following procedure explains how to control the overall

volume of SMF data playback. You can adjust volume while

playback is stopped or ongoing.

Press the ACCOMP VOLUME button.

•This causes the “SMF Vol.” indicator to appear on the

display, along with a value that indicates the current

SMF volume setting.

Use the [+] and [–] buttons or the number buttons

to adjust the SMF volume.

•You can specify a setting in the range of 000

(minimum) to 127 (maximum).

•Pressing [+] and [–] at the same time returns the SMF

volume setting to 100.

•Note that this setting does not affect the volume of

the notes you play on the keyboard.

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM87

E-88

SMF Player Error Messages

The following explains what you should do when an error message appears in the SMF Player Mode.

735A-E-090A

Using the SMF Player

Use only Format 0 SMF data.

Use different data.

You are attempting to play SMF data that is

not Format 0.

There is a problem with the SMF data you are

trying to play or the data is corrupted.

Err Not SMF0

Err WrongDat

Error Message Cause Action

WK3000_e_74-88.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM88

E-89

735A-E-091B

MIDI

What is MIDI?

The letters MIDI stand for Musical Instrument Digital

Interface, which is the name of a worldwide standard for

digital signals and connectors that make it possible to

exchange musical data between musical instruments and

computers (devices) produced by different manufacturers.

MIDI compatible equipment can exchange keyboard key

press, key release, tone change, and other data as messages.

Though you do not need any special knowledge about MIDI

to use this keyboard as a stand-alone unit, MIDI operations

require a bit of specialized knowledge. This section provides

you with an overview of MIDI that will help to get you going.

MIDI Connections

MIDI messages are send out through the MIDI OUT terminal

of one device to the MIDI IN terminal of another machine

over a MIDI cable. To send a message from this keyboard to

another device, for example, you must use a MIDI cable to

connect the MIDI OUT terminal of this keyboard to the MIDI

IN terminal of the other device. To send MIDI messages back

to this keyboard, you need to use a MIDI cable to connect the

other device’s MIDI OUT terminal to the MIDI IN terminal

of this keyboard.

To use a computer or other MIDI device to record and

playback the MIDI data produced by this keyboard, you must

connect the MIDI IN and MIDI OUT terminals of both devices

in order to send and receive data.

If a MIDI THRU function provided by the software is being

run on a connected computer or other MIDI device, be sure

to turn this keyboard’s “Local Control Setting” off (page E-

82).

MIDI Channels

MIDI allows you to send the data for multiple parts at the

same time, with each part being sent over a separate MIDI

channel. There are 16 MIDI channels, numbered 1 through

16, and MIDI channel data is always included whenever you

exchange data (key press, pitch bend operation, etc.).

Both the sending device and the receiving machine must be

set to the same channel for the receiving device to correctly

receive and play data. If the receiving device is set to Channel

2, for example, it receives only MIDI Channel 2 data, and all

other channels are ignored.

This keyboard is equipped with multi-timbre capabilities,

which means it can receive messages over all 16 MIDI

channels and play up to 16 parts at the same time. Tone and

volume settings for each channel can be made using the

keyboard’s onboard Mixer, or by an external source that sends

required MIDI control messages.

Keyboard operations performed on this keyboard are sent

out by selecting a MIDI channel (1 to 16) and then sending

the appropriate message.

General MIDI

General MIDI standardizes MIDI data for all sound source

types, regardless of manufacturer. General MIDI specifies

such factors as tone numbering, drum sounds, and available

MIDI channels for all sound sources. This standard makes it

possible for all MIDI equipment to reproduce the same

nuances when playing General MIDI data, regardless of the

manufacturer of the sound source.

This keyboard supports General MIDI, so it can be used to

play commercially available pre-recorded General MIDI data

and General MIDI data send to it from a personal computer.

See the “Tone List” on page A-1 for details about the tones

that are available with GM tones numbered 000 to 127.

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

Computer etc.

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM89

E-90

Sending and Receiving MIDI

Messages

This keyboard can send notes you play on the keyboard, as

well as auto accompaniment patterns and Song Memory

playback as MIDI messages to another device.

MIDI Send Data

■Keyboard Play

Each keyboard part (Channels 1 through 4) is sent over its

own individual MIDI channel. When Auto Harmonize is

turned on, harmonize notes are also sent over each individual

MIDI channel.

■Auto Accompaniment or Song Memory Play

Each accompaniment part is sent over its own individual

MIDI channel. The “Accomp/Song MIDI Out” parameter

(page E-82) is used to specify whether a part is sent.

MIDI Message Receive

■Multi Channel Receive

The 16 mixer parts can be used to receive data over 16 MIDI

message channels at the same time.

■Chord Changes when Using Auto Accompaniment

MIDI messages received from an external device can be

interpreted as chord changes as specified by the fingerings

supported by the auto accompaniment system of this

keyboard. Use the “MIDI In Chord Judge” parameter (page

E-82) to turn this capability on and off.

•See the MIDI Implementation Chart at the back of this

User’s Guide for more information about each MIDI

message.

735A-E-092A

MIDI

MIDI Settings

You can change the settings of a number of parameters that

control how MIDI messages are sent and received.

MIDI Parameters

You can use the parameter setting procedure (page E-80) to

change the settings of the MIDI parameters described below.

See pages E-80 to E-83 for details about the setting menu and

procedure.

■MIDI In Chord Judge

This parameter determines whether note data received from

an external device should be interpreted as an auto

accompaniment chord fingering. Turn on this parameter

when you want to control auto accompaniment chords from

a computer or other external device.

on: Causes note data input through MIDI IN to be

interpreted as auto accompaniment chord fingerings.

The channel specified by the keyboard channel is used

for specifying chords.

oFF: Turns off “MIDI In Chord Judge”.

■

Accomp/Song MIDI Out (Accompaniment/Song MIDI Out)

Turn on this parameter when you want sound auto accom-

paniment or Song Memory on an external devices sound

source.

on: Outputs auto accompaniment or Song Memory as MIDI

messages through the keyboard’s MIDI OUT terminal.

oFF: Does not output auto accompaniment or Song Memory.

NOTE

•For details about MIDI specifications, visit the CASIO

Website.

http://world.casio.com

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM90

E-91

Using the Data Download Service

You can download the following type of data from CASIO

MUSIC SITE (http://music.casio.com) to your computer, and

then transfer it to the keyboard.

•Tones

•Tones with waves

•Drum sets with waves

•DSP

•Rhythms

•Registrations

•Songs

•SMF

•Package File Data

■Data and Application Software

Data itself as well as application software for transferring data

between your computer and the keyboard are available for

download at the CASIO MUSIC SITE.

■Application Software

You can run the application software on your computer and

transfer data you download from the CASIO MUSIC SITE to

the keyboard, and also use your computer’s hard disk for

long-term storage of data you transfer from the keyboard to

your computer.

•See the instructions provided at the CASIO MUSIC SITE

for full information about how to download the application

software and data.

•See the application software’s online help for information

about how to use the software.

* CASIO MUSIC SITE

http://music.casio.com/

Go to the above URL.

Select a region or country.

Select a download service for the INTERNET DATA

EXPANSION SYSTEM data.

•Note that the service you should use depends on the

area or country.

MIDI

To connect to a computer

Be sure to turn off the keyboard and your computer before

connecting them. You should also set the volume controller

of the keyboard to a relatively low volume.

Connect the keyboard’s MIDI interface to your

computer’s MIDI interface.

Turn on the keyboard, and then turn on your

computer or other connected device.

Start up the software you want to use on your

computer.

NOTE

•When using the application software, make sure that

the tone setting screen (the screen that appears after

turning on power) is on the keyboard’s display screen.

DATA ACCESS Lamp

•The DATA ACCESS lamp lights whenever the keyboard is

exchanging data with a connected computer over a MIDI

cable connection. Never disconnect the MIDI cable while

the DATA ACCESS lamp is lit.

CASIO MUSIC SITE

MIDI IN

MIDI Interface

OUT

MIDI OUT

Internet

Service

Provider

735A-E-093B

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM91

E-92

Saving Data

You can save data you create and data you transfer to the keyboard from a computer to the keyboard’s built-in Flash memory, or

to a SmartMedia cardTM or floppy diskette (WK-3500). In this manual, SmartMedia cards and floppy diskettes are referred to as

“external storage media”.

The types of files that can be saved to external storage media are listed below. Note that each type of file can be saved to a specific,

pre-defined user area, as shown in the “Savable File Types” table below.

After you load SMF data from external storage media and store it in a user area, you can play it back using the SMF Player Mode.

See “Using the SMF Player” on page E-84 for more information.

Savable File Types

Type

SMF

Rhythm Pattern

Registration

User song created in the Song Memory Mode

Drum sound with waves

Drawbar organ tone

Tone

Tone with waves

DSP

Package File*1

All User Data*2

Display

Indicator

Smf

Pattern

Regist

Song

Dr wave

Drawbar

Tone

Tn wave

Dsp

Package

Saved Data

1 Tune

1 Pattern

1 Bank

1 Tune

1 Set

1 Tone

1 Type

1 Pack

User Memory

Capacity

200

100

File Name

Extension

MID

Z00

Z01

Z02

Z03

Z04

Z05

Z06

Z07

Z08

Z09

All Data

*1: Package File

A package file combines tone settings, DSP effect settings, and other setup data into a single file that you can manage and load as

a unit (package). Once you create a package file, you will be able to change the entire setup of the keyboard by loading a single

package file.

To create a package file, you need to download special package file software from the CASIO Music Site (http://music.casio.com/)

and install it on your computer. For details about the package file software, see the information provided at the CASIO Music Site

IMPORTANT!

•Loading a package file loads the setting data listed in the table under “Package File Data Contents” into the user area, and

replaces all current data with the data in the package file.

•When loading package data from a SmartMedia card or floppy diskette (WK-3500 only), the display’s level meter shows the

progress of the load operation as shown below.

[Load Start] [Load End]

*2: SmartMedia card only

Package File Data Contents

Data Type

SMF

Rhythm Patterns

Registrations

Drum Sound With Waves

Drawbar Organ Tones

Tones

Tones With Waves

DSP

User Area

10 Songs

148 to 155 (8 rhythms)

7 to 8 (2 banks)

803 (1 set)

190 to 199 (10 tones)

690 to 699 (10 tones)

710 to 719 (10 tones)

190 to 199 (10 effects)

735A-E-094B

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM92

E-93

Saving Data

Using a SmartMedia Card

Your keyboard is equipped with a card slot that supports the

use of SmartMediaTM cards that you can use to store tunes

you transfer from your computer, songs you have stored in

the keyboard’s memory, and other data. This provides you

with access to virtually unlimited volumes of data that you

can instantly load whenever you need it.

IMPORTANT!

•There are two types of SmartMedia cards: 3.3V and 5V.

Note that this keyboard supports use of 3.3V type

SmartMedia cards only.

•Never try to use a 5V type SmartMedia card with this

keyboard.

•Note you will not be able to store data to, delete data

from, or rename a SmartMedia card that has a write

protect sticker affixed to the card’s write protect area.

About SmartMediaTM Cards

• You can purchase SmartMedia cards at most household

appliance stores, computer stores, etc.

• SmartMedia cards are commercially available in capacities

ranging from 8MB up to 128MB.

• Though a SmartMedia card is about the size of a postage

stamp, its capacity ranges from 8 to 100 times the capacity

of a floppy diskette.

• The data read rate from a SmartMedia card is very fast.

• SmartMediaTM is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.

Contacts

Write protect area

SmartMedia Card and Card Slot

Precautions

IMPORTANT!

•Be sure to carefully read all documentation that comes

with the SmartMedia card for important information about

how to handle it.

•Avoid storing and using SmartMedia cards in the

following types of locations. Such conditions can cause

corruption of data stored on the card.

•Areas subject to high temperatures, high humidity, or

corrosive agents

•Areas subject to strong electrostatic charge or

electrical noise

•Whenever handling a SmartMedia card, make sure that

you never touch its contacts with your fingers.

•If the data access lamp is lit and the message “Pls Wait”

is on the display, it means that data on the SmartMedia

card is being accessed by a save, read, or delete

operation. Never remove the SmartMedia card from the

card slot or turn off the keyboard while the card is being

accessed. Doing so can corrupt the data on the

SmartMedia card or even damage the card slot.

•Never try to insert any type of card other than a 3.3V

SmartMedia card into the card slot. Doing so can

damage the keyboard.

•Inserting a SmartMedia card that is charged with static

electricity into the card slot can cause malfunction of

the keyboard. If this happens, turn the keyboard off and

then back on again.

•A SmartMedia card that has been in the card slot for a

long time may feel hot when you remove it. This is normal

and does not indicate malfunction.

•Note that a SmartMedia card has a limited service life.

After long use, you may not be able to store data to,

read data from, and/or delete data from a card. When

this happens, you will need to purchase a new

SmartMedia card.

CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. assumes no responsibility

for any loss or damage to you or any third party arising

out of the loss or corruption of data.

735A-E-095B

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM93

E-94

Inserting and Removing a

SmartMedia Card

The following describes how to insert a SmartMedia card into

the card slot and how to remove it.

To insert a SmartMedia card into the card slot

With the contact side of the SmartMedia card facing

downwards, insert the card into the card slot. Carefully push

the card into the slot as far as it will go.

To remove a SmartMedia card from the slot

After making sure that the data access lamp is not lit and the

message “Pls Wait” is not on the display, carefully pull the

card from the slot.*

*Never remove the SmartMedia card from the card slot or

turn off the keyboard card while any of the following

conditions exists.

•While the keyboard is in the SMF Player Mode and there

is a pointer next to CARD on the display

•While the data access lamp is lit and the message “Pls

Wait” is on the display, indicating that a card access

operation is being performed

IMPORTANT!

•Never remove the SmartMedia card from the card slot

or turn off the keyboard while card data is being accessed

by a save, read, or delete operation. Doing so can corrupt

the data on the SmartMedia card or even damage the

card slot.

Using the Floppy Disk Drive

(WK-3500 Only)

Floppy Disk Drive Features

The WK-3500 comes with a built-in disk drive, which

provides you with the capabilities described below.

•You can save song memory and synthesizer data on a floppy

diskette for long-term storage. When you need the data

again, simply insert the diskette into the disk drive and

load it.

•You can play back SMF (standard MIDI file) data created

on a personal computer and saved to diskette.

Floppy Diskette Precautions

IMPORTANT!

•Avoid the following locations when storing and using

diskettes. Any of the conditions noted below can cause

data stored on the diskette to become corrupted.

•Near TVs, on top of audio equipment, or in any area

exposed to magnetism. Take special care to keep

diskettes away from any source of magnetism.

•Areas exposed to direct sunlight, or subject to high

humidity or temperature extremes.

•Failure to observe any of the following precautions can

cause data stored on the diskette to become corrupted.

•Never try to take a diskette apart.

•Never open the shutter of the diskette or touch the

film inside with your fingers.

•Never bend a diskette or otherwise subject it to rough

handling.

•Affix labels in the spaces provided only, and do not

affix labels on top of previous ones.

•Do not eject the diskette from the drive while the access

lamp is lit or flashing or turn off keyboard power with a

diskette in the drive. Doing either can cause data on the

diskette to become corrupted and can even cause

malfunction of the disk drive.

•Never insert any foreign objects into the disk drive. Doing

so can cause it to malfunction.

•The disk drive uses a magnetic head. A dirty head cannot

read data from a diskette properly and can corrupt

existing data on the diskette. To avoid this, be sure to

use a commercially available head cleaning diskette to

periodically clean the head.

Saving Data

735A-E-096A

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM94

E-95

•Do not use a computer, another electronic musical

instrument, or any other device to change a file name or

file contents created with this keyboard. Doing so can

make the data unusable by this keyboard and even

cause malfunction of the keyboard.

Note that CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. shall not be held

liable for any loss to you or any third party due to

corruption or accidental erasure of data on a diskette.

About Floppy Diskettes

This section contains important information about handling

diskettes. Be sure to read it before going any further.

Diskette Types

The WK-3500 supports use of both 3.5’ 2HD (1.44MB

formatted) and 2DD (720KB formatted) diskettes. Use of other

disk sizes and capacities is not supported.

Diskette Type Indicators

2HD ...... A 2HD diskette is marked with the letters “HD” in

the upper right corner of the front side. Also, there

is a square hole in the lower right corner.

2DD ....... This type of diskette does not have a hole in the

lower right corner.

Write Protection

IMPORTANT!

•You can write protect a diskette so data on it cannot be

deleted and no new data can be stored on the diskette.

Also, a write protected diskette cannot be formatted. You

can read data from a diskette regardless of whether or

not it is write protected.

•When the write protect hole is open as shown in the

illustration, you can read the contents of the diskette,

but you cannot write data to or delete data from the

diskette. After saving important data to a diskette, be

sure to open its write protect hole to protect the data

against accidental changes or deletion.

•The diskette that comes with the keyboard contains

sample data and programs. It is write protected to avoid

accidental erasure or formatting. Make sure you handle

this diskette carefully to avoid damaging or erasing its

data.

Write protect (hole open) Write enabled

(hole blocked with tab)

Data save, data delete,

disk formatting are all

enabled.

Write protect tab

Hole

open

Saving Data

735A-E-097A

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM95

E-96

Inserting and Ejecting a Diskette

The following describes how to insert a diskette into the disk

drive and how to eject it.

To insert a diskette into the floppy disk drive

With the label area of the diskette facing up, insert

the diskette shutter first into the disk drive, as shown

in the illustration.

Slide the diskette into the drive as far as it will go,

until it clicks into place.

To eject a diskette from the floppy disk drive

IMPORTANT!

•Before ejecting a diskette, always check to make sure

that the access lamp is not lit or flashing. A lit or flashing

access lamp means that the keyboard is performing a

data read or write operation. Ejecting a diskette while it

is being accessed can cause its data to become

corrupted.

Press the Eject button.

•This causes the diskette to be partially ejected from

the disk drive.

Remove the diskette from the drive by hand.

Using External Storage Media

This section explains how to use SmartMedia cards and

floppy diskettes (WK-3500 only) for data storage. In this

manual, SmartMedia cards and floppy diskettes are

collectively referred to as “external storage media”.

NOTE

•Layer, split, and Auto Harmonize are automatically turned

off while external storage is being used. Tone and rhythm

selection, and rhythm playback are also all disabled.

Basic SmartMedia Card Operation

Insert the SmartMedia card into the card slot.

Enter the Card Mode.

* WK-3500

Press the DISK/CARD button twice.

•This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/

CARD on the display, and also displays “Card” in the

display’s text area.

* WK-3000

Press the CARD button.

•This causes a pointer to appear next to the CARD on

the display, and also displays “Card” in the display’s

text area.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to display the Card

Mode menu.

Saving Data

735A-E-098A

CURSOR

DISK/CARD

●WK-3500

●WK-3000

CARD

Eject button

[+]/[–]

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM96

E-97

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to display

the screen for the type of operation you want to

perform.

• See the pages referenced below for details about using

each of the above menu operations.

Loading a file (Crd Load): page E-99

Saving a file (Crd Save): page E-98

Renaming a file (Crd Rename): page E-100

Deleting a file (Crd Delete): page E-101

Formatting a SmartMedia card (Crd Format):

page E-102

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to advance to the

file type selection screen.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to select the

file type.

• Pressing the EXIT or [왔] CURSOR button at this time

will return you to the Card Mode menu.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to display the file

name selection screen.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons or [+] and

[–] buttons to select the file name.

• Pressing the EXIT or [왖] CURSOR button at this time

will return you to the file type selection screen.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to advance to the

user area selection screen for file loading.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons or [+] and

[–] buttons to select the user area.

• Pressing the EXIT or [왖] CURSOR button at this time

will return you to the file name selection menu.

Save

Load

Rename

Delete

Forma t

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

[왗]

[왘]

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to load the file.

• This will display a confirmation message asking

whether you really want to load the data. If you

already have data in the user area, the message will

ask if you want to overwrite the existing data with

the loaded data.

• Press the YES button to load the data. This will cause

the message “Pls Wait” to appear on the display to

indicate that a card access operation is being

performed. Never try to perform any other operation

on the keyboard while the card is being accessed. The

message “Complete” will appear on the display after

data loading is complete. After a few seconds, the

message will be replaced by the file name selection

screen.

• If you do not want to continue with data loading, press

the EXIT button or the NO button in response to the

above confirmation message. This will return you to

the user area selection screen in step 9.

After you are finished performing the SmartMedia

card operation you want, press the DISK/CARD

button (CARD button on the WK-3000) to exit the

Card Mode.

• Exiting the Card Mode causes the pointer next to the

display’s DISK/CARD pointer (CARD pointer on the

WK-3000) to disappear.

Basic Floppy Diskette Operation

(WK-3500 Only)

Insert a floppy diskette into the keyboard’s floppy

disk drive.

Press the DISK/CARD button.

•This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/

CARD on the display, and also displays “Disk” in the

display’s text area.

Perform the same operations as those starting from

step 3 of under “Basic SmartMedia Card Operation”

on page E-96.

•Note that Disk Mode operations are indicated on the

display by the prefix “Fd” in place of the “Crd” prefix

of the Card Mode operations.

Saving Data

735A-E-099B

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM97

E-98

Saving Files

You can use the procedures in this section to save Song

Memory, Synthesizer, and other data you create to external

storage media for later loading when you need it. See

“Savable File Types” on page E-92 for information about the

type of data you can save.

PREPARATION

•SmartMedia Card

Insert a properly formatted SmartMedia card into the

keyboard’s card slot. Make sure that the sticker is

removed from the card’s write area, which enables

writing.

•Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)

Insert a properly formatted floppy diskette into the

keyboard’s floppy disk drive. Make sure that the

diskette’s write protect hole is closed, which enables

writing.

NOTE

•Depending on the type and the amount of data involved,

a SmartMedia card or floppy diskette (WK-3500 only)

data save or load operation can take anywhere from a

few minutes to more than 10 minutes to complete. The

message “Pls Wait” will remain on the display to indicate

that a data save or load operation is being performed.

IMPORTANT!

•Never try to perform any operation while “Pls Wait” is

displayed. Performing any operation can cause Flash

memory or SmartMedia card or floppy diskette data to

be deleted, and damage the keyboard’s memory and

cause it to malfunction.

To save a file to external storage media

What you should do first depends on the type of

external storage media you are using.

•SmartMedia Card:

On the WK-3500 press the DISK/CARD button twice.

On the WK-3000, press the CARD button once.

• This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/

CARD or CARD on the display, and also displays

“Card” in the display’s text area.

•Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only):

Press the DISK/CARD button.

•This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/

CARD on the display, and also displays “Disk” in

the display’s text area.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to display the Card

Mode (or Disk Mode) menu.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to display

the “Save” screen.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to advance to the

file type selection screen.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to select the

file type.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to advance to the

user area selection screen.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons or [+] and

[–] buttons to select the user area you want.

•

The numeric area of the display will show the user area

number, while the text area will show the user area name

• Pressing the EXIT or [왖] CURSOR button at this time

will return you to the file type selection screen.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to advance to the

file name input screen.

• Use the [+] and [–] buttons to scroll through letters at

the current cursor location. See the page E-103 for

information about inputting text.

• Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to move the

cursor left and right.

Saving Data

735A-E-100B

CURSOR

DISK/CARD

●WK-3500

●WK-3000

CARD

[+]/[–]

YES/NO

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM98

E-99

After inputting the file name, press the [왔] CURSOR

button.

• If you are saving song data, the file type selection

screen appears next. Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR

buttons to select “SMF” or “SONG”. After selecting a

file type, press the [왔] CURSOR button.

• This will display a confirmation message asking

whether you really want to save the data. If you

already have data in the user area, the message will

ask if you want to overwrite the existing data with

the loaded data.

Press the YES button to save the data. This will cause

the message “Pls Wait” to appear on the display to

indicate that a card access operation is being

performed. Never try to perform any other operation

on the keyboard while the card is being accessed. The

message “Complete” will appear on the display after

data save is complete. After a few seconds, the message

will be replaced by the file name selection screen

• If you do not want to continue with data save, press

the EXIT button or the NO button in response to the

above confirmation message. This will return you to

the user area selection screen in step 7.

After you are finished performing the save

operation, press the DISK/CARD button (CARD

button on the WK-3000) to exit the Card Mode.

Loading a File

Use the procedures in this section when you want to load data

from external storage media into the keyboard’s user area.

IMPORTANT!

•

Note the following important points whenever using the SMF

Player Mode to play back data saved with the above procedure

* SmartMedia Card

To perform the procedure below, you must have a

SmartMedia card to which SMF data has been copied from

a computer. Insert a SmartMedia card that you have

formatted on the keyboard into the card slot of your

computer, and copy the SMF data you want to load into

the directory named “CASIO_MD”. Note that you will not

be able to load the data if it is not located inside the

“CASIO_MD” directory. If you create a sub-directory inside

of the “CASIO_MD” directory, the keyboard will not be

able to load any data inside the sub-directory.

* Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 only)

This keyboard is able to see only files that are in the top

(root) directory of the floppy diskette. It will not be able to

see any files that are located in a subdirectory.

PREPARATION

•SmartMedia Card

•Insert the SmartMedia card that contains the data you

want to load into the keyboard’s card slot.

•Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)

•Insert the floppy diskette that contains the data you

want to load into the keyboard’s floppy disk drive.

NOTE

•Depending on the type and the amount of data involved,

a SmartMedia card or floppy diskette (WK-3500 only)

data save or load operation can take anywhere from a

few minutes to more than 10 minutes to complete. The

message “Pls Wait” will remain on the display to indicate

that a data save or load operation is being performed.

IMPORTANT!

•Never try to perform any operation while “Pls Wait” is

displayed. Performing any operation can cause Flash

memory or SmartMedia card or floppy diskette data to

be deleted, and damage the keyboard’s memory and

cause it to malfunction.

To recall file data from external storage media

What you should do first depends on the type of

external storage media you are using.

•SmartMedia Card

On the WK-3500 press the DISK/CARD button twice.

On the WK-3000, press the CARD button once.

• This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/

CARD or CARD on the display, and also displays

“Card” in the display’s text area.

•Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)

Press the DISK/CARD button.

•This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/

CARD on the display, and also displays “Disk” in

the display’s text area.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to display the Card

Mode (or Disk Mode) menu.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to display

the “Load” screen.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to advance to the

file type selection screen.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to select the

type file you want to load.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to display the file

name selection screen.

Use the [

왗

] and [

왘

] CURSOR buttons or [+] and [–]

buttons to select the name of the file you want to load

Saving Data

735A-E-101B

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM99

E-100

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to advance to the

user area selection screen.

•The user area selection screen will not appear if the

file you selected in step 5 is a package file or “All

Data” file. In this case, skip step 9 and go directly to

step 10.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons or [+] and

[–] buttons to select the user area to which you

want to import the loaded file data.

•The numeric area of the display will show the user

area number, while the text area will show the user

area name.

•Pressing the EXIT or [왖] CURSOR button at this time

will return you to the file type selection screen.

After selecting the user area, press the [왔] CURSOR

button.

•This will display a confirmation message asking

whether you really want to load the data. If you

already have data in the user area, the message will

ask if you want to overwrite the existing data with

the loaded data.

Press the YES button to recall the data.

•This will cause the message “Pls Wait” to appear on

the display to indicate that a card access operation is

being performed. Never try to perform any other

operation on the keyboard while the card is being

accessed. The message “Complete” will appear on the

display after data loading is complete. After a few

seconds, the message will be replaced by the file name

selection screen.

•If you do not want to continue with data loading, press

the EXIT button or the NO button in response to the

above confirmation message. This will return you to

the user area selection screen in step 9.

After you are finished performing the load

operation, press the DISK/CARD button (CARD

button on the WK-3000) to exit the Card Mode.

Renaming a File

You can use the procedures in this section to change the name

of a file that you previously saved to external storage media.

PREPARATION

•SmartMedia Card

•Insert the SmartMedia card that contains the file you

want to rename into the keyboard’s card slot. Make

sure that the sticker is removed from the card’s write

area, which enables writing.

•Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)

•Insert the floppy diskette that contains the file you want

to rename into the keyboard’s floppy disk drive. Make

sure that the diskette’s write protect hole is closed,

which enables writing.

To rename a file saved to external storage media

What you should do first depends on the type of

external storage media you are using.

•SmartMedia Card

On the WK-3500 press the DISK/CARD button twice.

On the WK-3000, press the CARD button once.

•This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/

CARD or CARD on the display, and also displays

“Card” in the display’s text area.

•Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)

Press the DISK/CARD button.

•This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/

CARD on the display, and also displays “Disk” in

the display’s text area.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to display the Card

Mode (or Disk Mode) menu.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to display

the “Rename” screen.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to advance to the

file type selection screen.

Saving Data

735A-E-102B

CURSOR

DISK/CARD

●WK-3500

●WK-3000

CARD

[+]/[–]

YES/NO

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM100

E-101

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to select the

type of the file you want to rename.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to display the file

name selection screen.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons or [+] and

[–] buttons to select the name of the file you want

to rename.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to advance to the

file name input screen.

•Use the [+] and [–] buttons to scroll through letters at

the current cursor location. See the page E-103 for

information about inputting text.

•Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to move the

cursor left and right.

After inputting the file name, press the [왔] CURSOR

button.

•This will display a confirmation message asking

whether you really want to change the name.

Press the YES button to change the file name.

•This will cause the message “Pls Wait” to appear on

the display to indicate that a card access operation is

being performed. Never try to perform any other

operation on the keyboard while the card is being

accessed. The message “Complete” will appear on the

display after renaming is complete. After a few

seconds, the message will be replaced by the file name

selection screen.

•If you do not want to continue with file renaming,

press the EXIT button or the NO button in response

to the above confirmation message. This will return

you to the user area selection screen in step 5.

After you are finished performing the rename

operation, press the DISK/CARD button (CARD

button on the WK-3000) to exit the Card Mode.

Deleting a File

You can perform the procedure in this section to delete a file

from external storage media.

IMPORTANT!

•Note that the file delete operation cannot be undone.

Make sure that you no longer need data before you

delete it.

PREPARATION

•SmartMedia Card

•Insert the SmartMedia card that contains the file you

want to delete into the keyboard’s card slot. Make sure

that the sticker is removed from the card’s write area,

which enables writing.

•Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)

•Insert the floppy diskette that contains the file you want

to delete into the keyboard’s floppy disk drive. Make

sure that the diskette’s write protect hole is closed,

which enables writing.

To delete a file from external storage media

What you should do first depends on the type of

external storage media you are using.

•SmartMedia Card

On the WK-3500 press the DISK/CARD button twice.

On the WK-3000, press the CARD button once.

• This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/

CARD or CARD on the display, and also displays

“Card” in the display’s text area.

•Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)

Press the DISK/CARD button.

•This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/

CARD on the display, and also displays “Disk” in

the display’s text area.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to display the Card

Mode (or Disk Mode) menu.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to display

the “Delete” screen.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to advance to the

file type selection screen.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to select the

type of the file you want to delete.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to display the file

name selection screen.

Saving Data

735A-E-103B

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM101

E-102

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons or [+] and

[–] buttons to select the name of the file you want

to delete.

After selecting the file, press the [왔] CURSOR

button.

•This will display a confirmation message asking

whether you really want to delete the file.

Press the YES button to delete the file.

•This will cause the message “Pls Wait” to appear on

the display to indicate that a card access operation is

being performed. Never try to perform any other

operation on the keyboard while the card is being

accessed. The message “Complete” will appear on the

display after file deletion is complete. After a few

seconds, the message will be replaced by the file name

selection screen.

•If you do not want to continue with file deletion, press

the EXIT button or the NO button in response to the

above confirmation message. This will return you to

the file name selection screen.

After you are finished performing the delete

operation, press the DISK/CARD button (CARD

button on the WK-3000) to exit the Card Mode.

Formatting External Storage Media

Use the procedures in this section to format external storage

media before using it for the first time, or when you want to

delete all of the contents on a SmartMedia card or floppy

diskette.

IMPORTANT!

•Note that formatting a card or diskette that already

contains data causes all of that data to be deleted. Data

deleted by the format operation cannot be recovered.

Before performing the procedure below, check to make

sure that the media does not contain any data you might

need.

PREPARATION

•SmartMedia Card

•Insert the SmartMedia card you want to format into

the keyboard’s card slot. Make sure that the sticker is

removed from the card’s write area, which enables

writing.

•Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)

•Insert the floppy diskette you want to format into the

keyboard’s floppy disk drive. Make sure that the

diskette’s write protect hole is closed, which enables

writing.

Saving Data

735A-E-104A

CURSOR

DISK/CARD

●WK-3500

●WK-3000

CARD

[+]/[–]

YES/NO

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM102

E-103

Saving Data

735A-E-105A

Inputting Characters

The following describes the types of characters you can input

when saving data to the user area and external storage media.

User Area Data

External Storage Media Data

You can input the same characters as those that are allowed

for MS-DOS file names.

To format external storage media

What you should do first depends on the type of

storage media you are using.

•SmartMedia Card

On the WK-3500 press the DISK/CARD button twice.

On the WK-3000, press the CARD button once.

•This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/

CARD or CARD on the display, and also displays

“Card” in the display’s text area.

•Floppy Diskette (WK-3500 Only)

Press the DISK/CARD button.

•This causes a pointer to appear next to the DISK/

CARD on the display, and also displays “Disk” in

the display’s text area.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button to display the Card

Mode (or Disk Mode) menu.

Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to display

the “Format” screen.

Press the [왔] CURSOR button.

•WK-3500 Users

If you are formatting a floppy diskette, a screen will

appear here for specification of the floppy diskette

density. Use the [왗] and [왘] CURSOR buttons to select

either “2DD” or “2HD”, and then press the [왔]

CURSOR button.

•This will display a confirmation message asking

whether you really want to format the media.

Press the YES button to start formatting.

•This will cause the message “Pls Wait” to appear on

the display to indicate that a card access operation is

being performed. Never try to perform any other

operation on the keyboard while the card is being

accessed. The message “Complete” will appear on the

display after media formatting is complete. After a

few seconds, the message will be replaced by the file

name selection screen.

•If you do not want to continue with formatting, press

the EXIT button or the NO button in response to the

above confirmation message. This will return you to

the mode menu.

After you are finished performing the format

operation, press the DISK/CARD button (CARD

button on the WK-3000) to exit the Card Mode.

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM103

E-104

Saving Data

735A-E-106B

SmartMedia Card Error Messages

Display Message Cause Action

Err Card R/W

Err CardFull

Err No Card

Err Name

Err ReadOnly

Err Format

Err Mem Full

Err Not SMF0

Err No File

Err Protect

Err Convert

Err WrongDat

There is something wrong with the card.

The card is full.

1. The card is not set correctly in the card slot.

2. There is no card in the card slot or the card

was removed part way through a card

operation.

1. A file with the same name as the one you

are trying to use already exists.

2. You are trying to use a file name that is not

allowed by MS-DOS.

Attempt to save a file using the same name as

an existing file that is read only.

1. The format of the card is not compatible

with this keyboard.

2. The card is not formatted.

3. The card is damaged.

Keyboard memory became full while

importing data from card.

The file you are reading is not an SMF 0 format

file.

The keyboard cannot find any file it can read

on the card.

The card is write protected.

There is not enough memory to save data

produced by converting song data from SONG

format to SMF format.

The data on the card is corrupted.

Use a different card.

1. Use a different card.

2. Delete files you no longer need from the

card (page E-101).

1. Remove the card and reinsert it correctly

(page E-94).

2. Insert a card into the card slot. Never remove

a card from the card slot while a card access

operation is in progress.

1. Use a different name (page E-100).

2. Name files using the allowable characters

(page E-103).

Save the new file to a different card or use

another name.

1. Change to a card that has the proper format.

................................................................ E-102

2. Format the card. ................................... E-102

3. Use a different card.

1. Delete data you no longer need from the

user area that corresponds to the file you

are trying to store.

2. If you have song data stored in Song

Memory (SG0 to 4), delete the song data

you no longer need. ............................... E-72

Use SMF 0 format files only.

Use a card that contains data stored by this

keyboard or compatible data from another

device.

1. Use a different card.

2. Remove the card’s write protect sticker to

enable data storage. ............................... E-93

Delete SMFs you no longer need from your

SMF data (page E-80).

Use other data or another card.

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM104

E-105

Disk Drive Error Messages (WK-3500 Only)

Display Message Cause Action

Err ReadOnly

Err Format

Err Disk R/W

Err DiskFull

Err Mem Full

Err Not SMF0

Err No Disk

Err No File

Err Protect

Err Convert

Err WrongDat

Err Name

Attempt to save a file using the same name as

an existing file that is read only.

1. The format of the diskette is not compatible

with this keyboard.

2. The diskette is not formatted.

3. The diskette is damaged.

The diskette is damaged.

The diskette is full.

Keyboard memory became full while

importing data from diskette.

The file you are reading is not an SMF 0 format

file.

1. The diskette is not loaded in the drive

correctly.

2. No diskette is loaded in the drive.

The keyboard cannot find any file it can read

on the diskette.

The diskette is write protected.

There is not enough memory to save data

produced by converting song data from SONG

format to SMF format.

The file you are reading is a wrong format file.

The data on the diskette is corrupted.

A file with the same name as the one you are

trying to use already exists on the floppy

diskette.

Save the new file to a different diskette or use

another name.

1. Change to a diskette that has the proper

format. .................................................... E-102

2. Format the diskette. ............................. E-102

3. Use a different diskette.

Use a different diskette.

1. Use a different diskette.

2. Delete any files you no longer need in order

to make room for the data you want to save.

................................................................E-101

1. Delete data you no longer need from the

user area that corresponds to the file you

are trying to store.

2. If you have song data stored in Song

Memory (SG0 to 4), delete the song data

you no longer need. ............................... E-72

Use SMF 0 format files only

1. Eject the diskette from the drive and reload

it. ............................................................... E-94

2. Load a diskette into the drive.

Use a diskette that contains data stored by this

keyboard or compatible data from another

device.

1. Use a different diskette.

2. Close the diskette’s write protect hole to

enable data storage. ............................... E-95

Delete SMFs you no longer need from your

SMF data (page E-80).

Use other data or another diskette.

Use a different name (page E-100).

735A-E-107A

Saving Data

WK3000_e_89-105.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM105

E-106

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause Action See page

No keyboard sound

Any of the following symptoms

while using battery power.

•Dim power indicator

•Instrument does not turn on.

•Display that is flickering,

dim, or difficult to read

•Abnormally low speaker/

headphone volume

•Distortion of sound output

•Occasional interruption of

sound when playing at high

volumes

•Sudden power failure when

playing at high volumes

•Flickering or dimming of the

display when playing at high

volume

•Continued sound output

even after you release a key

•A tone that is totally different

from the one that is selected.

•Abnormal rhythm pattern

and demo tune play

•Loss of power, sound

distortion, or low volume

when playing from a

connected computer or MIDI

device

•Sudden power failure while

reading from or writing to a

diskette (WK-3500 only)

Auto Accompaniment does not

sound.

1. Power supply problem.

2. Power is not turned on.

3. Volume setting is too low.

4. Playing in the accompaniment

keyboard area while the MODE

button setting is CASIO CHORD

or FINGERED.

5. Local Control is off.

6. Mixer channel 1 is turned off.

7. Mixer channel 1 volume setting

is too low.

8. The DSP volume parameter is set

too low.

9. The Expression value of the file

data played back on the SMF

player is too low.

Low battery power

1. Accompaniment volume is set to

000.

2. Auto Accompaniment part

Channels 6 through 10 are turned

off.

3. Auto Accompaniment part

Channels 6 through 10 volume

setting is too low.

1. Correctly attach the AC adaptor,

make sure that batteries poles (+/

–) are facing correctly, and check

to make sure that batteries are

not dead.

2. Press the POWER button to turn

on power.

3. Use the VOLUME knob to

increase volume.

4. None of the accompaniment

mode indicators are lit, which

means Auto Accompaniment is

turned off.

5. Turn on Local Control.

6. Use the Mixer to turn channel 1

on.

7. Use the Mixer to raise the volume

setting for channel 1.

8. Increase the DSP parameter

value.

9. Exit then re-enter the SMF Player

Mode, or change the SMF Player

play-along part.

Replace the batteries with a set of

new ones or use the AC adaptor.

1. Use the ACCOMP VOLUME

button to increase the volume.

2. Use the Mixer to turn the channels

on.

3. Use the Mixer to raise the volume

setting for the applicable channel.

E-16, 17

E-22

E-38

E-82

E-47

E-48

E-50

E-84

E-16, 17

E-46

E-47

E-48

735A-E-108A

WK3000_e_106-112.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM106

E-107

Sound output does not change

when key pressure is varied.

Playing the keyboard sounds

two tones.

Different tones sound when

keys in different keyboard

ranges are pressed.

The key or tuning does not

match when playing along with

another MIDI machine.

Parts suddenly drop out during

song memory playback.

Some parts do not play at all

during song memory playback.

Nothing happens when the

LAYER or SPLIT button is

pressed.

No sound is produced when

playing MIDI data from a

computer.

Playing on the keyboard

produces an unnatural sound

when connected to a computer.

Cannot record chord

accompaniment data on a

computer.

Touch response is turned off.

Layer is turned on.

Split is turned on.

1. The tuning or transpose

parameter is set to a value other

than 00.

2. Mixer coarse tune, fine tune, and/

or octave shift settings are values

other than 00.

The number of tones being played

at the same time exceeds the

keyboard’s limitation.

1. Channels are turned off.

2. Volume setting is too low.

1. One or more of the melody

channels (2 through 4) is turned

off.

2. The volume setting of one or

more of the melody channels (2

through 4) is too low.

3. The keyboard is in record

standby.

4. The SMF Player Mode is currently

being use.

1. MIDI cables are not connected

properly.

2. Channel is turned off, or volume

setting is too low.

The computer’s MIDI Thru function

is turned on.

Accomp/Song MIDI Out is turned

off.

Press the TRANSPOSE/

FUNCTION button to turn it on.

Press the LAYER button to turn off

layering.

Press the SPLIT button to turn off

split.

1. Change the transpose or tuning

parameter value to 00.

2. Use the Mixer to change the

coarse tune, fine tune, and/or

octave shift settings to 00.

Use the Mixer to turn unneeded

channels off and decrease the

number of parts being played.

1. Use the Mixer to turn channels

on.

2. Use the Mixer to check the

volume setting.

1. Use the Mixer to turn on

Channels 2 through 4.

2. Use the Mixer to raise the volume

setting of Channels 2 through 4.

3. The LAYER and SPLIT buttons

are disabled during recording

and record standby.

4. Turn off the SMF Player Mode.

LAYER and SPLIT are not

available while the SMF Player

Mode is in use.

1. Connect MIDI cables properly.

2. Use the Mixer to turn the channel

on, or raise the volume setting.

Turn off the MIDI Thru function on

the computer or turn off Local

Control on the keyboard.

Turn on Accomp/Song MIDI Out.

E-78

E-74

E-75

E-77, 78

E-49

E-47

E-48

E-47

E-48

E-74, 75

E-84

E-89

E-46, 47

E-82

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause Action See page

735A-E-109A

WK3000_e_106-112.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM107

E-108

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause Action See page

Flash memory is corrupted. There

is something wrong with the card.

Someone may have turned off the

keyboard while data was being

stored in Flash memory or

something else has caused Flash

memory contents to become

corrupted for some reason.

1. The card is write-protected.

2. The card is not inserted correctly

into the card slot.

3. There is not enough space left on

the card.

4. You are trying to use a card whose

voltage or capacity is not

supported by this keyboard.

5. The card is damaged.

1. The card is not inserted correctly

into the card slot.

2. There is not enough space

available in the area into which

you are trying to import the data.

3. You are trying to use a card whose

voltage or capacity is not

supported by this keyboard.

4. The card is damaged.

1. Remove the batteries from the

keyboard and disconnect the AC

adaptor and press the POWER

button.

2. Reload the batteries and/or

reconnect the AC adaptor, and

then press the POWER button

again to turn on power.

3. Use the TRANSPOSE/

FUNCTION button to perform

the system reset operation.

•If this does not solve the

problem, contact your nearest

authorized CASIO Service

Provider to request repair.

Use the TRANSPOSE/FUNCTION

button to perform the system reset

operation. If this does not correct

the problem, contact your nearest

authorized CASIO Service Provider

to request maintenance.

1. Remove the write-protect sticker

from the card.

2. Correctly insert the card into the

card slot.

3. Use a different card or delete files

you no longer need from the card

you are using.

4. Use only a card of the voltage

and capacity specified for this

keyboard.

5. Use a different card.

1. Correctly insert the card into the

card slot.

2. Delete rhythm, SMF, or tone with

wave data currently in the

keyboard’s Flash memory to

make room from the imported

data.

3. Use only a card of the voltage

and capacity specified for this

keyboard.

4. Use a different card.

E-83

E-93

E-94

E-101

E-93

E-94

E-83

E-93

735A-E-110B

The keyboard starts up

abnormally when it is turned

on.

A downloaded tone with

waveform contains noise or

keyboard operations become

abnormal when user data is

selected.

Cannot save data to a card.

Cannot recall data from a card.

WK3000_e_106-112.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM108

E-109

Specifications

735A-E-111B

Model: WK-3500/3000

Keyboard: 76 standard-size keys, 6 1/4 octaves with touch response (OFF/1/2/3)

Tones: 300 Advanced Tones + 200 Preset Tones + 16 Drum Sets + 100 standard user

tones + 20 user tones with waves* + 4 drum sets with waves* + 50 drawbar

organ tones + 100 user drawbar organ tones + 150 Drawbar Organ Tones (790

tones total); layer/split

Rhythm Instrument Tones: 61

Polyphony: 32 notes maximum (10 for certain tones)

Drawbar Organ Function

Drawbars: 9 (16’, 5 1/3’, 8’, 4’, 2 2/3’, 2’, 1 3/5’, 1 1/3’, 1’)

Percussion: Second, Third

Click: On, Off

Effects: DSP (200 types: internal, 100 user areas) + Reverb (16 types) + Chorus (16 types)

+ Equalize (10 types, 4 bands)

Auto Accompaniment

Rhythm Patterns: 156 (internal, 16 user areas*)

Tempo: Variable (226 steps, = 30 to 255)

Chords: 3 fingering methods (CASIO CHORD, FINGERED, FULL RANGE CHORD)

Rhythm Controller: START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING 1 and 2, VARIATION/FILL-IN 1 and 2,

SYNCHRO/FILL-IN NEXT

Accomp Volume: 0 to 127 (128 steps)

One-touch Presets: Recalls settings for tone, tempo, layer on/off, and harmonize on/off in

accordance with rhythm.

Auto Harmonize: 10 types : Automatic addition of notes that harmonize with melody note in

accordance with specified Auto Accompaniment chords.

Memory Function

Songs: 5

Recording Tracks: 6 (2 through 6 are melody tracks)

Recording Methods: Real-time, step

Memory Capacity: Approximately 10,000 notes (total for 5 songs)

Edit Function: Equipped

Demo Tunes: 3

<WK-3500>

<WK-3000>

Tune Number Name Composer Play Time

0 Garage Flava Steave Turner 2:15

1 Breath of Air Hage Software 2:19

2 Nora Park TECH-NOTE INTERNATIONAL LTD. 2:06

Tune Number Name Composer Play Time

0 Nora Park TECH-NOTE INTERNATIONAL LTD. 2:06

1 Garage Flava Steave Turner 2:15

2 Strut With Beauty Edward Alstrom 1:52

WK3000_e_106-112.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM109

E-110

Synthesizer Function

Parameters: Attack time; release time; resonance; cutoff frequency; vibrato type; vibrato

delay; vibrato depth; vibrato rate; octave shift; level; touch sense; reverb send;

chorus send; DSP line; DSP type; DSP parameter; 300 Advanced Tones + 200

Preset Tones + 16 Drum Sounds + 124 User Tones + 150 Drawbar Organ Tones

(790 tones total)

Registration Memory

Number of Setups: 32 (4 setups x 8 banks)

Memory Contents: Tone, Rhythm, Tempo, Layer on/off, Split on/off, Split point, Harmonize on/

off, Mixer settings (Channels 1 to 10), Effect settings, Touch Response settings,

Assignable jack setting, Transpose, Tuning, Accompaniment volume setting,

Pitch bend range, Auto Harmonize type, MODE button setting, Synchro

standby state, Mixer Hold, DSP Hold, Synthesizer Mode parameters

Mixer Function

Channels: 16

Parameters: Tone; part on/off; volume; pan pot; octave shift; coarse tune; fine tune; reverb

send; chorus send; DSP line; DSP level, DSP pan, DSP system reverb send, DSP

system chorus send

MIDI: 16 multi-timbre receive, GM Level 1 standard

Other Functions

Pitch Bend Range: Adjustable (12 semitones upwards and downwards)

Modulation: Equipped

Transpose: 49 steps (–24 semitones to +24 semitones)

Tuning: Variable (A4 = approximately 440Hz ±100 cents)

LCD: Adjustable contrast

SMF Player: Flash memory storage for up to 200 files*

Supported Format: SMF0

Flash Memory

Capacity: 2MB

Shared Area: Approximately 1.5MB (waveform data, accompaniment data, SMF data)

Further storage of waveform, accompaniment, and SMF data becomes

impossible after the total of such data reaches approximately 1.5MB.

Card Slot 3.3V SmartMediaTM (8MB, 16MB, 32MB, 64MB, 128MB)

Functions: Save and load of user tones, user songs, and registration data; playback of SMF;

card formatting; file delete; file rename

Floppy Disk Drive (WK-3500 only)

Type: 3.5" FDD

Formats: 2DD (720KB MS-DOS format)

2HD (1.44MB MS-DOS format)

Functions: Save and load of user tones, user songs, and registration data; playback of SMF;

disk formatting; file delete; file rename

Specifications

735A-E-112B

WK3000_e_106-112.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM110

E-111

Terminals

MIDI Terminals: IN, OUT

Sustain/Assignable Terminal: Standard jack (sustain, sostenuto, soft, rhythm start/stop)

•WK-3500

Headphones: Stereo standard jack

Output Impedance : 200Ω

Output Voltage : 250mV (RMS) MAX

Line Out (R, L/MONO): Standard jack x 2

Output Impedance : 3kΩ

Output Voltage : 1.5V (RMS) MAX

•WK-3000

Headphone/Output Terminal: Stereo standard jack

Output Impedance: 200Ω

Output Voltage: 5.5V (RMS) MAX

Power Supply Terminal: 12V DC

Power Supply: Dual power supply system

Batteries: 6 D-size batteries

Battery Life: Approximately 4 hours continuous operation on alkaline batteries

AC Adaptor: AD-12

Auto Power Off: Turns power off approximately six minutes after last key operation. Enabled

under battery power only, can be disabled manually.

Speaker Output: 6.1W + 6.1W

Power consumption: 12V 18W

Dimensions: 122.3 x 42.3 x 16.0 cm (48 3/16 x 16 11/16 x 6 5/16 inch)

Weight: WK-3500: Approximately 10.0 kg (22.0 lbs) (without batteries)

WK-3000: Approximately 9.5 kg (20.9 lbs) (without batteries)

Specifications

735A-E-113A

*The same memory area is used to store waveform data, accompaniment data, and SMF data.

WK3000_e_106-112.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM111

E-112

Avoid heat, humidity or direct sunlight.

Do not overexpose the instrument to direct sunlight, or place it near an air conditioner, or in any extremely hot place.

Do not use near a TV or radio.

This instrument can cause video or audio interference with TV and radio reception. If this happens, move the instrument away

from the TV or radio.

Do not use lacquer, thinner or similar chemicals for cleaning.

Clean the instrument with a soft cloth dampened in a weak solution of water and a neutral detergent. Soak the cloth in the

solution and squeeze until it is almost dry.

Avoid use in areas subjected to temperature extremes.

Extremely high or low temperature can cause figures on the LCD screen to become dim and difficult to read. This condition

should correct itself when the instrument is brought back to normal temperature.

NOTE

•You may notice lines in the finish of the case of this instrument. These lines are a result of the molding process used to shape

the plastic of the case. They are not cracks or breaks in the plastic, and are no cause for concern.

Care of your Instrument

735A-E-114A

WK3000_e_106-112.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM112

A-1

Appendix

735A-E–115A

Tone List

Advanced Tones

0 PIANO STEREO GRAND PIANO 0 51 16 N RvbHall1

1 PIANO STEREO MELLOW PIANO 0 52 16 N GateRvb2

2 PIANO STEREO BRIGHT PIANO 1 50 16 N Equalize

3 PIANO GRAND PIANO 0 48 32 N RvbHall1

4 PIANO MELLOW PIANO 0 50 32 N Equalize

5 PIANO BRIGHT PIANO 1 48 32 N Enhancer

6 PIANO GRAND PIANO WIDE 0 49 32 N Reflect

7 PIANO HARPSICHORD 6 51 32 N CmpChoRf

8 PIANO ELEC. GRAND PIANO 2 48 32 N Equalize

9 PIANO SYNTH-STR PIANO 0 54 16 N Cho Flan

10 PIANO MODERN PIANO 1 51 16 N Equalize

11 PIANO STRINGS PIANO 1 52 16 N RvbHall1

12 PIANO VOICE PIANO 0 53 16 N Reflect

13 PIANO DANCE PIANO 1 53 16 N Enha Dly

14 PIANO MODERN E.G.PIANO 2 50 16 N ChoDly 1

15 PIANO HONKY-TONK 1 3 48 16 N Chorus 4

16 PIANO 1 OCTAVE PIANO 3 51 16 N Equalize

17 PIANO 2 OCTAVE PIANO 3 50 16 N RvbRoom2

18 PIANO COUPLED HARPSICHORD 6 49 16 N CmpChoRf

19 E.PIANO ELEC. PIANO 1 4 48 32 N Chorus 3

20 E.PIANO MODERN EP 1 5 48 16 N Chorus 3

21 E.PIANO TREMOLO E.PIANO 4 55 32 N Cho Trem

22 E.PIANO 60’S E.PIANO 4 51 32 N Auto Pan

23 E.PIANO MELLOW E.PIANO 4 52 16 N CmpChoRf

24 E.PIANO SYNTH-STR. E.PIANO 2 5 52 16 N Equalize

25 E.PIANO CLAVI 7 48 32 N CmpChoRf

26 E.PIANO SOFT E.PIANO 5 50 16 N Equalize

27 E.PIANO AUTO WAH E.PIANO 4 56 32 N Auto Wah

28 E.PIANO PHASER E.PIANO 4 57 32 N PhaAPan1

29 E.PIANO GLASS E.PIANO 4 50 16 N Equalize

30 E.PIANO E.PIANO PAD 4 53 16 N StPhaser

31 E.PIANO SYNTH-STR. E.PIANO 1 4 54 16 N Equalize

32 E.PIANO MODERN EP 2 5 49 16 N Enha Dly

33 E.PIANO STRINGS E.PIANO 5 53 16 N ChoDly 1

34 E.PIANO RESONANCE CLAVI 7 50 32 N Auto Wah

35 E.PIANO PULSE CLAVI 7 49 32 N CmpEnDly

36 CHROM.PERC TREMOLO VIBRAPHONE 11 48 32 N Cho Trem

37 CHROM.PERC MARIMBA 12 48 32 N Reflect

38 CHROM.PERC GLOCKENSPIEL 9 48 32 1 Reflect

39 CHROM.PERC CELESTA 8 48 32 N Reflect

40 CHROM.PERC VIBRAPHONE 11 50 32 N Reflect

41 CHROM.PERC PHASER MARIMBA 12 50 32 N PhaDly 2

42 CHROM.PERC DELAY GLOCKENSPIEL 9 49 32 1 PhaDly 2

43 CHROM.PERC DELAY CELESTA 8 49 32 N 3Tap Dly

44 ORGAN ROTARY DRAWBAR 16 52 32 N RotRef 1

45 ORGAN ROTARY PERC. ORGAN 1 17 52 16 N RotRef 2

46 ORGAN 70’S ORGAN 17 49 32 N Rotary 1

47 ORGAN TREMOLO ORGAN 16 49 32 N Cho Trem

48 ORGAN JAZZ DRAWBAR 17 53 16 N RotRef 1

49 ORGAN ROCK ORGAN 18 48 16 N Rotary 2

50 ORGAN ROTARY ELEC. ORGAN 16 53 32 N Rotary 2

51 ORGAN ROTARY PERC. ORGAN 2 17 54 16 N RotRef 1

52 ORGAN CHURCH ORGAN 1 19 48 16 N RvbHall2

No. Tone Group Tone Name Program

Change

Bank Select

MSB

Maximum

Polyphony

Range

Type DSP Type

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM1

A-2

Appendix

735A-E–116A

53 ORGAN CHAPEL ORGAN 19 51 32 N RvbHall2

54 ORGAN ACCORDION 21 48 16 N Reflect

55 ORGAN HARMONICA 22 48 32 N Reflect

56 ORGAN BANDONEON 23 48 16 N Reflect

57 ORGAN DRAWBAR ORGAN 1 16 48 32 N Reflect

58 ORGAN ELEC. ORGAN 16 51 32 N Reflect

59 ORGAN DRAWBAR ORGAN 2 16 50 32 N Rotary 1

60 ORGAN OVD ROTARY ORGAN 16 54 32 N Od Rot 2

61 ORGAN PERC. ORGAN 1 17 48 16 N Reflect

62 ORGAN PERC. ORGAN 2 17 51 16 N Rotary 2

63 ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN 17 50 16 N Reflect

64 ORGAN OVD ROCK ORGAN 18 49 16 N OdRtRef1

65 ORGAN CHURCH ORGAN 2 19 49 16 N RvbHall1

66 ORGAN OCTAVE ACCORDION 21 49 16 N CmpChoRf

67 ORGAN SLOW HARMONICA 22 49 32 N RvbRoom2

68 ORGAN NEO BANDONEON 23 49 16 N ChoDly 4

69 GUITAR NYLON GUITAR 24 48 32 –1 Equalize

70 GUITAR STEEL GUITAR 25 48 32 –1 Equalize

71 GUITAR JAZZ GUITAR 26 48 32 –1 CmpChoRf

72 GUITAR CHORUS CLEAN GUITAR 27 49 32 –1 CmpChoRf

73 GUITAR CRUNCH ELEC. GUITAR 27 52 32 –1 CrnDelay

74 GUITAR OVD FRONT GUITAR 29 49 32 –1 CmpOdDly

75 GUITAR FEEDBACK DIST. GT 30 52 16 –1 DistDly1

76 GUITAR ROTARY GUITAR 27 53 32 –1 Rotary 2

77 GUITAR MUTED DIST. GUITAR 28 49 32 –1 MetalDly

78 GUITAR MELLOW NYLON GUITAR 24 51 16 –1 ChoDly 3

79 GUITAR ENHANCED STEEL GUITAR 25 51 32 –1 Enha Dly

80 GUITAR 12 STRING GUITAR 25 49 16 –1 Equalize

81 GUITAR CHORUS STEEL GUITAR 25 50 16 –1 ChoDly 4

82 GUITAR UKULELE 24 49 32 N CmpChoRf

83 GUITAR BANJO 105 48 32 N Equalize

84 GUITAR OCT JAZZ GUITAR 26 50 16 –1 RvbRoom3

85 GUITAR OVERDRIVE GUITAR 29 48 16 –1 CmpDelay

86 GUITAR AUTO WAH OVERDRIVE GT 29 51 16 –1 AWhOdDly

87 GUITAR OVD REAR GUITAR 29 50 32 –1 Ovrdrive

88 GUITAR MORE DISTORTION GT 30 51 16 –1 DistDly2

89 GUITAR DISTORTION FRONT GT 30 50 32 –1 DistDly2

90 GUITAR CLEAN GUITAR 27 48 32 –1 Equalize

91 GUITAR ELEC. GUITAR FRONT 27 51 32 –1 Equalize

92 GUITAR ELEC. GUITAR REAR 27 50 32 –1 Equalize

93 GUITAR MUTED GUITAR 28 48 32 –1 Equalize

94 GUITAR DISTORTION GUITAR 30 48 16 –1 CmpDelay

95 GUITAR FEEDBACK GUITAR 30 49 16 –1 CmpCrDly

96 GUITAR DISTORTION CLEAN GT 30 53 32 –1 CmpCrDly

97 BASS ACOUSTIC BASS 32 48 32 –1 Reflect

98 BASS FINGERED BASS 33 48 32 –1 Limiter

99 BASS PICKED BASS 34 48 32 –1 Comp 2

100 BASS FRETLESS BASS 35 48 32 –1 ChoDly 1

101 BASS SLAP BASS 37 48 32 –1 Comp 2

102 BASS SAW SYNTH-BASS 1 38 48 16 –1 Chorus 1

103 BASS ANALOG SYNTH-BASS 38 52 32 –1 PhaCho 1

104 BASS SQR SYNTH-BASS 1 39 48 32 –1 Od Rot 1

105 BASS RESO. SQR BASS 1 39 50 32 –1 Enha Cho

106 BASS RESO. SAW BASS 1 38 53 32 –1 AWhChDly

107 BASS DISTORTION SQR BASS 39 51 16 –1 DistDly1

108 BASS RESO. SAW BASS 2 38 49 16 –1 PhaDly 2

109 BASS DIGITAL BASS 1 39 52 32 –1 Comp 2

110 BASS RIDE BASS 32 49 16 –1 RvbRoom1

No. Tone Group Tone Name Program

Change

Bank Select

MSB

Maximum

Polyphony

Range

Type DSP Type

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM2

A-3

Appendix

735A-E–117A

111 BASS CHORUS FINGERED BASS 33 49 16 –1 Crn Cho

112 BASS COMP. PICKED BASS 34 49 16 –1 CmpEnDly

113 BASS FLAN. FRETLESS BASS 35 49 16 –1 Cho Flan

114 BASS MORE SLAP BASS 37 49 16 –1 Comp 2

115 BASS ACID BASS 38 50 32 –1 Enhancer

116 BASS SAW SYNTH-BASS 2 38 54 32 –1 Equalize

117 BASS TRI SYNTH-BASS 1 39 53 32 –1 Equalize

118 BASS SINE BASS 39 54 32 –1 Limiter

119 BASS ORGAN BASS 1 38 55 32 –1 Comp 1

120 BASS DIGITAL BASS 2 39 55 16 –1 Chorus 2

121 ORCHESTRA VIOLIN 40 48 32 N GateRvb2

122 ORCHESTRA CELLO 42 48 32 –1 GateRvb2

123 ORCHESTRA VIOLA 41 48 32 N GateRvb2

124 ORCHESTRA PIZZICATO ENSEMBLE 45 49 16 N RvbHall1

125 ORCHESTRA HARP 46 48 32 N Reflect

126 ORCHESTRA SLOW VIOLIN 40 49 32 N RvbHall2

127 ORCHESTRA SLOW CELLO 42 49 32 –1 RvbHall2

128 ORCHESTRA PIZZICATO 45 48 32 N Reflect

129 ORCHESTRA HARPS 46 49 16 N Reflect

130 ENSEMBLE STEREO STRINGS 48 51 16 N RvbHall1

131 ENSEMBLE STRING ENSEMBLE 48 48 32 N RvbRoom3

132 ENSEMBLE SLOW STRINGS 49 48 32 N ChoDly 3

133 ENSEMBLE CHAMBER 49 49 16 N Reflect

134 ENSEMBLE PURE SYNTH-STRINGS 1 50 50 16 N ChoDly 3

135 ENSEMBLE SYNTH-STRINGS 1 50 48 32 N ChoDly 3

136 ENSEMBLE STEREO CHOIR 52 50 16 N RvbHall1

137 ENSEMBLE VOICE UUH 53 49 16 N RvbRoom1

138 ENSEMBLE SYNTH-VOICE 1 54 48 32 N Chorus 4

139 ENSEMBLE SYNTH-VOICE 2 54 49 32 N ChoDly 3

140 ENSEMBLE POP HIT 1 55 52 16 N Equalize

141 ENSEMBLE POP HIT 2 55 53 16 N FlanDly1

142 ENSEMBLE RESO SYNTH-STRINGS 51 48 32 N ChoDly 3

143 ENSEMBLE SYNTH-CHOIR 52 51 16 N StXDelay

144 ENSEMBLE VOICE DOO 53 48 32 N RvbRoom1

145 ENSEMBLE BRIGHT STRINGS 48 49 32 N RvbHall1

146 ENSEMBLE WIDE STRINGS 48 52 16 N RvbHall1

147 ENSEMBLE MELLOW STRINGS 49 50 32 N RvbHall1

148 ENSEMBLE ORCHESTRA STRINGS 1 49 51 16 N RvbRoom3

149 ENSEMBLE PURE SYNTH-STRINGS 2 50 51 16 N DistDly1

150 ENSEMBLE PHASER SYNTH-STRINGS 51 49 16 N PhaAPan2

151 ENSEMBLE SYNTH-DOO 53 50 16 N DistDly1

152 ENSEMBLE SYNTH-VOICE 3 54 52 16 N DistDly1

153 ENSEMBLE VOICE PAD 54 53 16 N FlanDly3

154 ENSEMBLE CHOIR STRINGS 48 53 16 N RvbHall1

155 ENSEMBLE ORCHESTRA STRINGS 2 49 52 16 N RvbHall1

156 ENSEMBLE BLOW VOICE 54 51 16 N DistDly1

157 ENSEMBLE NOISY SYNTH-VOICE 54 54 16 N FlanDly2

158 ENSEMBLE BASS HIT 55 49 16 N DistDly1

159 ENSEMBLE PIANO HIT 55 54 16 N GateRvb2

160 ENSEMBLE ORGAN HIT 55 55 16 N Rotary 2

161 ENSEMBLE ORCHESTRA HIT 1 55 48 16 N RvbHall1

162 ENSEMBLE TECHNO HIT 55 56 16 N MetalDly

163 BRASS VELO. TRUMPET 56 51 16 N GateRvb2

164 BRASS VELO. TROMBONE 57 50 16 –1 GateRvb2

165 BRASS MUTE TRUMPET 59 48 32 N Enhancer

166 BRASS OCTAVE FRENCH HORN 60 50 16 –1 RvbHall1

167 BRASS STEREO BRASS 61 50 16 N Enha Dly

168 BRASS BRASS + SYNTH 61 51 16 N Enha Dly

No. Tone Group Tone Name Program

Change

Bank Select

MSB

Maximum

Polyphony

Range

Type DSP Type

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM3

A-4

Appendix

735A-E–118A

169 BRASS DEEP SYNTH-BRASS 1 62 51 16 N Enha Dly

170 BRASS SOFT SYNTH-BRASS 63 51 16 N Enha Dly

171 BRASS VINTAGE SYNTH-BRASS 63 48 16 N RvbHall2

172 BRASS TRUMPET 1 56 48 32 N RvbHall1

173 BRASS TRUMPET P 56 50 16 N RvbHall1

174 BRASS TROMBONE 57 48 16 –1 RvbHall1

175 BRASS TROMBONE F 57 49 32 –1 RvbHall1

176 BRASS WAH MUTE TRUMPET 59 49 32 N LFO Wah

177 BRASS FRENCH HORN 60 48 16 –1 RvbHall1

178 BRASS BRASS SFZ 61 53 16 N Comp 2

179 BRASS DEEP SYNTH-BRASS 2 62 53 16 N Enha Dly

180 BRASS TUBA 58 48 32 –1 RvbHall1

181 BRASS SQR SYNTH-BRASS 62 52 16 N Delay

182 BRASS WARM SYNTH-BRASS 63 52 16 N Delay

183 BRASS ANALOG BRASS 1 62 48 32 N Comp 2

184 BRASS BRASS + TRUMPET 61 52 16 N RvbHall2

185 BRASS SLOW SYNTH-BRASS 63 49 16 N ChoDly 4

186 BRASS TROMBONE SECTION 57 51 16 N GateRvb2

187 BRASS BRASS 61 48 32 N RvbHall2

188 BRASS OCTAVE BRASS 61 54 16 N RvbHall2

189 BRASS ANALOG BRASS 2 62 54 32 N Equalize

190 BRASS BRASS + FRENCH HORN 61 55 16 N RvbHall2

191 BRASS STACK TUBA 58 49 16 –1 Comp 2

192 REED BREATHY TENOR SAX 66 49 16 –1 Enhancer

193 REED BREATHY ALTO SAX 65 49 16 –1 Enhancer

194 REED MELLOW SOPRANO SAX 64 49 16 N CmpEnDly

195 REED VELO. TENOR SAX 66 50 16 –1 GateRvb2

196 REED VELO. ALTO SAX 65 51 32 –1 GateRvb2

197 REED VELO. CLARINET 71 49 16 N Reflect

198 REED OBOE 68 48 32 N GateRvb2

199 REED SOPRANO SAX 64 48 32 N Equalize

200 REED ALTO SAX 65 48 32 –1 Equalize

201 REED TENOR SAX 66 48 32 –1 Equalize

202 REED ALTO SAX FF 65 50 32 –1 Equalize

203 REED BARITONE SAX 67 48 32 –1 Equalize

204 REED CLARINET 71 48 32 N GateRvb2

205 REED ALTO SAXYS 65 52 16 –1 Equalize

206 REED TENOR SAXYS 66 51 16 –1 Equalize

207 REED STACK BARITONE SAX 67 49 16 –1 Comp 2

208 REED SYNTH-OBOE 68 49 16 N ChoDly 4

209 PIPE VELO. FLUTE 73 49 16 N GateRvb2

210 PIPE PICCOLO 72 48 32 1 Equalize

211 PIPE PAN FLUTE 75 48 32 N GateRvb2

212 PIPE BOTTLE BLOW 76 48 32 N Equalize

213 PIPE RECORDER 74 48 32 N GateRvb2

214 PIPE WHISTLES 78 49 16 N ChoDly 4

215 PIPE FLUTE 73 48 32 N Reflect

216 PIPE PICCOLO ENSEMBLE 72 49 16 1 Equalize

217 PIPE MELLOW FLUTE 73 50 16 N Reflect

218 PIPE OCTAVE FLUTE 73 51 16 N Equalize

219 PIPE FLUTE + REED 73 52 16 N StXDelay

220 PIPE SYNTH-PAN FLUTE 75 49 16 N AWhChDly

221 PIPE SYNTH-RECORDER 74 49 16 N ChoDly 4

222 PIPE WHISTLE 78 48 32 N Od Rot 2

223 SYNTH-LEAD SAW TOOTH LEAD 81 48 16 N Enha Dly

224 SYNTH-LEAD MELLOW SAW LEAD 81 53 16 N Enha Dly

225 SYNTH-LEAD GR LEAD 1 81 54 16 N PhaDly 2

226 SYNTH-LEAD SQUARE LEAD 1 80 48 16 N ChoDly 2

No. Tone Group Tone Name Program

Change

Bank Select

MSB

Maximum

Polyphony

Range

Type DSP Type

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM4

A-5

Appendix

735A-E–119A

227 SYNTH-LEAD SQUARE LEAD 2 80 51 16 N ChoDly 2

228 SYNTH-LEAD VOX SQR LEAD 80 52 16 N ChoDly 4

229 SYNTH-LEAD CALLIOPE LEAD 82 48 16 N Equalize

230 SYNTH-LEAD CHIFF LEAD 1 83 48 16 N Comp 1

231 SYNTH-LEAD CHARANG LEAD 84 48 16 N Equalize

232 SYNTH-LEAD GT SYNTH-LEAD 1 84 49 16 N PhaAPan1

233 SYNTH-LEAD SOLO VOX 85 48 16 N PhaDly 1

234 SYNTH-LEAD FIFTH LEAD 86 48 16 N Auto Wah

235 SYNTH-LEAD HUSKY SAW 86 49 16 N PhaDly 1

236 SYNTH-LEAD BASS LEAD 1 87 48 16 N Chorus 2

237 SYNTH-LEAD BASS LEAD 2 87 50 16 N LFO Wah

238 SYNTH-LEAD VOX SAW LEAD 81 57 16 N RgChoDly

239 SYNTH-LEAD SQUARE LEAD 3 80 53 16 N FlanDly1

240 SYNTH-LEAD MELLOW SQR LEAD 80 54 16 N Tremolo

241 SYNTH-LEAD ADVANCED CALLIOPE 82 49 16 N RvbPlate

242 SYNTH-LEAD SEQ SAW 1 81 55 16 N Equalize

243 SYNTH-LEAD REED SAW 81 56 16 N Enha Cho

244 SYNTH-LEAD PIPE LEAD 82 50 16 N Reflect

245 SYNTH-LEAD ATTACK SQR 1 80 55 16 N Comp 2

246 SYNTH-LEAD PERC. CHIFF 1 83 49 16 N Comp 1

247 SYNTH-LEAD PLUCK LEAD 1 84 50 16 N FlanDly2

248 SYNTH-LEAD VOX LEAD 1 85 50 16 N FlanDly2

249 SYNTH-LEAD 5TH MELLOW 86 50 16 N StXDelay

250 SYNTH-LEAD 4TH LEAD 86 51 16 N Auto Pan

251 SYNTH-LEAD REED LEAD 87 51 16 N Equalize

252 SYNTH-LEAD RESO. SAW LEAD 81 58 16 N Phaser

253 SYNTH-LEAD GR LEAD 2 81 59 32 N CmpCrDly

254 SYNTH-LEAD DETUNED SAW 81 51 16 N Chorus 2

255 SYNTH-LEAD ATTACK SQR 2 80 56 16 N 3Tap Dly

256 SYNTH-LEAD SQUARE WAVE 1 80 49 32 N Auto Pan

257 SYNTH-LEAD SQUARE WAVE 2 80 57 32 N AWhChDly

258 SYNTH-LEAD CHIFF LEAD 2 83 50 16 N Comp 1

259 SYNTH-LEAD PLUCK LEAD 2 84 51 16 N FlanDly2

260 SYNTH-LEAD TECH POLYSYNTH 1 86 52 16 N Ring Mod

261 SYNTH-LEAD RESO LEAD 86 53 16 N Enha Dly

262 SYNTH-LEAD FRET LEAD 87 52 16 N Enha Dly

263 SYNTH-LEAD TECH POLYSYNTH 2 86 54 32 N LoFi Ref

264 SYNTH-LEAD 7TH SEQ 86 55 16 N Phaser

265 SYNTH-PAD FANTASY PAD 88 48 16 N PhaDly 2

266 SYNTH-PAD WARM PAD 89 48 32 N Equalize

267 SYNTH-PAD POLYSYNTH PAD 90 48 16 N Cho Trem

268 SYNTH-PAD NOISY SAW 90 49 16 N Lo-Fi

269 SYNTH-PAD SINE PAD 89 49 16 N Phaser

270 SYNTH-PAD SPACE VOICE 1 91 48 16 N RotRef 1

271 SYNTH-PAD COSMIC VOICE 91 50 16 N Rotary 2

272 SYNTH-PAD BOWED PAD 92 48 16 N 3Tap Dly

273 SYNTH-PAD METAL PAD 1 93 48 16 N St Delay

274 SYNTH-PAD HALO PAD 94 48 16 N StPhaser

275 SYNTH-PAD SWEEP PAD 95 48 32 N Equalize

276 SYNTH-PAD RAIN PAD 96 48 16 N Comp 1

277 SYNTH-PAD VIBE PAD 96 49 16 N CmpDelay

278 SYNTH-PAD MOVIE SOUND 97 48 16 N FlanDly1

279 SYNTH-PAD CRYSTAL PAD 2 98 50 16 N St Delay

280 SYNTH-PAD ATMOSPHERE PAD 99 48 16 N GateRvb1

281 SYNTH-PAD BRIGHTER 100 49 16 N Delay

282 SYNTH-PAD GOBLIN PAD 101 48 16 N Flanger

283 SYNTH-PAD STAR THEME 103 48 16 N PhaAPan2

284 SYNTH-PAD NEW FANTASY 88 49 16 N ChoDly 3

No. Tone Group Tone Name Program

Change

Bank Select

MSB

Maximum

Polyphony

Range

Type DSP Type

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM5

A-6

735A-E–120A

Appendix

Preset Tones

285 SYNTH-PAD WARM VOX 89 50 16 N Equalize

286 SYNTH-PAD FLUTE PAD 89 51 16 N Equalize

287 SYNTH-PAD ATTACK POLYSYNTH 90 50 16 N Equalize

288 SYNTH-PAD CHIFF CHOIR 91 51 16 N Cho Flan

289 SYNTH-PAD STAR VOICE 91 52 16 N DsChoDly

290 SYNTH-PAD SPACE VOICE 2 91 49 16 N RgChoDly

291 SYNTH-PAD GLASS PAD 92 50 16 N Equalize

292 SYNTH-PAD BOTTLE PAD 92 49 16 N LFO Wah

293 SYNTH-PAD METAL VOICE 93 49 16 N RotRef 1

294 SYNTH-PAD BRIGHTNESS PAD 100 48 16 N ChoDly 2

295 SYNTH-PAD CRYSTAL PAD 1 98 48 16 N PhaDly 2

296 SYNTH-PAD POLY SAW 90 51 16 N ChoDly 3

297 SYNTH-PAD BOUNCE PAD 94 49 16 N Dist Cho

298 SYNTH-PAD SLOW SWEEP 95 49 16 N RgChoDly

299 SYNTH-PAD STEEL PAD 99 49 16 N ChoDly 3

300 GM PIANO 1 0 64 32 N –

301 GM PIANO 2 1 64 32 N –

302 GM PIANO 3 2 64 32 N –

303 GM HONKY-TONK GM 3 64 16 N –

304 GM ELEC. PIANO 1 GM 4 64 32 N –

305 GM MODERN EP 1 GM 5 64 16 N –

306 GM HARPSICHORD GM 6 64 32 N –

307 GM CLAVI GM 7 64 32 N –

308 GM CELESTA GM 8 64 32 N –

309 GM GLOCKENSPIEL GM 9 64 32 N –

310 GM MUSIC BOX 10 64 16 N –

311 GM VIBRAPHONE GM 11 64 32 N –

312 GM MARIMBA GM 12 64 32 N –

313 GM XYLOPHONE 13 64 32 N –

314 GM TUBULAR BELL 14 64 32 N –

315 GM DULCIMER 15 64 16 N –

316 GM DRAWBAR ORGAN 1 GM 16 64 32 N –

317 GM PERC. ORGAN 1 GM 17 64 16 N –

318 GM ROCK ORGAN GM 18 64 16 N –

319 GM CHURCH ORGAN 1 GM 19 64 16 N –

320 GM REED ORGAN 20 64 32 N –

321 GM ACCORDION GM 21 64 16 N –

322 GM HARMONICA GM 22 64 32 N –

323 GM BANDONEON GM 23 64 16 N –

324 GM NYLON GUITAR GM 24 64 32 N –

325 GM STEEL GUITAR GM 25 64 32 N –

326 GM JAZZ GUITAR GM 26 64 32 N –

327 GM CLEAN GUITAR GM 27 64 32 N –

328 GM MUTED GUITAR GM 28 64 32 N –

329 GM OVERDRIVE GT GM 29 64 16 N –

330 GM DISTORTION GT GM 30 64 16 N –

331 GM GUITAR HARMONICS 31 64 32 N –

332 GM ACOUSTIC BASS GM 32 64 32 N –

333 GM FINGERED BASS GM 33 64 32 N –

334 GM PICKED BASS GM 34 64 32 N –

335 GM FRETLESS BASS GM 35 64 32 N –

No. Tone Group Tone Name Program

Change

Bank Select

MSB

Maximum

Polyphony

Range

Type DSP Type

No. Tone Group Tone Name Program

Change

Bank Select

MSB

Maximum

Polyphony

Range

Type DSP Type

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM6

A-7

Appendix

735A-E–121A

336 GM SLAP BASS 1 36 64 32 N –

337 GM SLAP BASS 2 GM 37 64 32 N –

338 GM SAW SYNTH-BASS 1 GM 38 64 16 N –

339 GM SQR SYNTH-BASS 1 GM 39 64 32 N –

340 GM VIOLIN GM 40 64 32 N –

341 GM VIOLA GM 41 64 32 N –

342 GM CELLO GM 42 64 32 N –

343 GM CONTRABASS 43 64 32 N –

344 GM TREMOLO STRINGS 44 64 32 N –

345 GM PIZZICATO GM 45 64 32 N –

346 GM HARP GM 46 64 32 N –

347 GM TIMPANI 47 64 32 N –

348 GM STRINGS 1 48 64 32 N –

349 GM STRINGS 2 49 64 32 N –

350 GM SYNTH-STRINGS 1 GM 50 64 32 N –

351 GM RESO SYNTH-STRINGS GM 51 64 32 N –

352 GM CHOIR 52 64 32 N –

353 GM VOICE DOO GM 53 64 32 N –

354 GM SYNTH-VOICE 1 GM 54 64 32 N –

355 GM ORCHESTRA HIT 1 GM 55 64 16 N –

356 GM TRUMPET 1 GM 56 64 32 N –

357 GM TROMBONE GM 57 64 32 N –

358 GM TUBA GM 58 64 32 N –

359 GM MUTE TRUMPET GM 59 64 32 N –

360 GM FRENCH HORN GM 60 64 16 N –

361 GM BRASS GM 61 64 32 N –

362 GM SYNTH-BRASS 1 62 64 32 N –

363 GM SYNTH-BRASS 2 63 64 16 N –

364 GM SOPRANO SAX GM 64 64 32 N –

365 GM ALTO SAX GM 65 64 32 N –

366 GM TENOR SAX GM 66 64 32 N –

367 GM BARITONE SAX GM 67 64 32 N –

368 GM OBOE GM 68 64 32 N –

369 GM ENGLISH HORN 69 64 32 N –

370 GM BASSOON 70 64 32 N –

371 GM CLARINET GM 71 64 32 N –

372 GM PICCOLO GM 72 64 32 N –

373 GM FLUTE GM 73 64 32 N –

374 GM RECORDER GM 74 64 32 N –

375 GM PAN FLUTE GM 75 64 32 N –

376 GM BOTTLE BLOW GM 76 64 32 N –

377 GM SHAKUHACHI 77 64 16 N –

378 GM WHISTLE GM 78 64 32 N –

379 GM OCARINA 79 64 32 N –

380 GM SQUARE LEAD 80 64 16 N –

381 GM PLAIN SAW LEAD 81 64 16 N –

382 GM CALLIOPE 82 64 16 N –

383 GM CHIFF 83 64 16 N –

384 GM CHARANG 84 64 16 N –

385 GM PLAIN SOLO VOX 85 64 16 N –

386 GM FIFTH SAW 86 64 16 N –

387 GM BASS LEAD 87 64 16 N –

388 GM FANTASY 88 64 16 N –

389 GM WARM SYNTH 89 64 32 N –

390 GM POLYSYNTH 90 64 16 N –

391 GM SPACE VOX 91 64 16 N –

392 GM BOWED GLASS 92 64 16 N –

393 GM METAL SYNTH 93 64 16 N –

No. Tone Group Tone Name Program

Change

Bank Select

MSB

Maximum

Polyphony

Range

Type DSP Type

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM7

A-8

394 GM HALO SYNTH 94 64 16 N –

395 GM SWEEP 95 64 32 N –

396 GM RAIN DROP 96 64 16 N –

397 GM SOUND TRACK 97 64 16 N –

398 GM CRYSTAL 98 64 16 N –

399 GM ATMOSPHERE 99 64 16 N –

400 GM BRIGHTNESS 100 64 16 N –

401 GM GOBLIN 101 64 16 N –

402 GM ECHOES 102 64 32 N –

403 GM SF 103 64 16 N –

404 GM SITAR 104 64 16 N –

405 GM BANJO GM 105 64 32 N –

406 GM SHAMISEN 106 64 32 N –

407 GM KOTO 107 64 32 N –

408 GM THUMB PIANO 108 64 32 N –

409 GM BAG PIPE 109 64 16 N –

410 GM FIDDLE 110 64 32 N –

411 GM SHANAI 111 64 32 N –

412 GM TINKLE BELL 112 64 32 N –

413 GM AGOGO 113 64 32 N –

414 GM STEEL DRUMS 114 64 16 N –

415 GM WOOD BLOCK 115 64 32 N –

416 GM TAIKO 116 64 32 N –

417 GM MELODIC TOM 117 64 32 N –

418 GM SYNTH-DRUM 118 64 32 N –

419 GM REVERSE CYMBAL 119 64 32 N –

420 GM GT FRET NOISE 120 64 32 N –

421 GM BREATH NOISE 121 64 32 N –

422 GM SEASHORE 122 64 16 N –

423 GM BIRD 123 64 16 N –

424 GM TELEPHONE 124 64 32 N –

425 GM HELICOPTER 125 64 32 N –

426 GM APPLAUSE 126 64 16 N –

427 GM GUNSHOT 127 64 32 N –

428 VARIOUS PIANO 1 WIDE 0 65 32 N –

429 VARIOUS MELLOW PIANO GM 0 66 32 N –

430 VARIOUS PIANO 2 WIDE 1 65 32 N –

431 VARIOUS TECHNO PIANO 1 70 32 N –

432 VARIOUS MODERN E.G.PIANO WIDE 2 65 32 N –

433 VARIOUS HONKY-TONK 2 3 65 16 N –

434 VARIOUS ELEC. PIANO 2 4 65 16 N –

435 VARIOUS 60’S E.PIANO GM 4 67 32 N –

436 VARIOUS MODERN EP + E.G.PIANO 5 65 16 N –

437 VARIOUS MODERN EP 3 5 67 16 N –

438 VARIOUS HARPSICHORD WIDE 6 66 32 N –

439 VARIOUS PULSE CLAVI GM 7 65 32 N –

440 VARIOUS VIBRAPHONE WIDE 11 65 32 N –

441 VARIOUS MARIMBA WIDE 12 65 32 N –

442 VARIOUS TREMOLO ORGAN GM 16 65 32 N –

443 VARIOUS DRAWBAR ORGAN 2 GM 16 66 32 N –

444 VARIOUS 70’S ORGAN GM 17 65 32 N –

445 VARIOUS JAZZ ORGAN GM 17 66 16 N –

446 VARIOUS CHURCH ORGAN 2 GM 19 65 16 N –

447 VARIOUS CHURCH ORGAN 3 19 66 16 N –

448 VARIOUS PUFF ORGAN 20 65 16 N –

449 VARIOUS NYLON GUITAR RLS 24 66 16 N –

450 VARIOUS 12 STRING GUITAR GM 25 65 16 N –

451 VARIOUS PEDAL STEEL 26 65 16 N –

Appendix

735A-E–122A

No. Tone Group Tone Name Program

Change

Bank Select

MSB

Maximum

Polyphony

Range

Type DSP Type

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM8

A-9

452 VARIOUS DETUNED CLEAN GT 27 65 16 N –

453 VARIOUS PLAIN ELEC. GUITAR REAR 27 66 32 N –

454 VARIOUS PLAIN ELEC. GUITAR FRONT 27 67 32 N –

455 VARIOUS FEEDBACK GUITAR GM 30 65 16 N –

456 VARIOUS GUITAR FEEDBACK 31 65 32 N –

457 VARIOUS SAW SYNTH-BASS 3 38 67 16 N –

458 VARIOUS RESO. SAW BASS 3 38 72 16 N –

459 VARIOUS SAW SYNTH-BASS 4 38 73 16 N –

460 VARIOUS ORGAN BASS 2 38 74 16 N –

461 VARIOUS SQR SYNTH-BASS 2 39 65 16 N –

462 VARIOUS KICK BASS 1 39 72 16 N –

463 VARIOUS SQR SYNTH-BASS 3 39 73 16 N –

464 VARIOUS ATTACK SQR BASS 39 74 16 N –

465 VARIOUS BRIGHT STRINGS GM 48 65 32 N –

466 VARIOUS OCTAVE STRINGS 48 66 16 N –

467 VARIOUS SYNTH-STRINGS 2 50 65 16 N –

468 VARIOUS PURE SYNTH-STRING 50 66 16 N –

469 VARIOUS CHOIR + UUH 52 65 16 N –

470 VARIOUS VOICE UUH GM 53 65 16 N –

471 VARIOUS SYNTH-VOICE 2 GM 54 65 32 N –

472 VARIOUS SEQ VOX 54 66 32 N –

473 VARIOUS BASS HIT GM 55 65 16 N –

474 VARIOUS POP HIT 3 55 66 16 N –

475 VARIOUS ORCHESTRA HIT 2 55 67 16 N –

476 VARIOUS TIMPANI HIT 55 73 16 N –

477 VARIOUS TRUMPET 2 56 65 32 N –

478 VARIOUS TROMBONE F GM 57 65 32 N –

479 VARIOUS MELLOW FRENCH HORN 60 65 16 N –

480 VARIOUS BRASS + TROMBONE 61 65 16 N –

481 VARIOUS SYNTH-BRASS 3 62 65 32 N –

482 VARIOUS OCTAVE SYNTH-BRASS 62 66 16 N –

483 VARIOUS SYNTH-BRASS SFZ 63 65 16 N –

484 VARIOUS BS SYNTH-BRASS 63 66 16 N –

485 VARIOUS SQUARE WAVE 80 65 32 N –

486 VARIOUS TRIANGLE WAVE 80 66 32 N –

487 VARIOUS SQUARE WAVE 3 80 74 32 N –

488 VARIOUS SAW WAVE 81 65 32 N –

489 VARIOUS SAW + SQR 81 66 16 N –

490 VARIOUS SEQ SAW 2 81 68 16 N –

491 VARIOUS PERC. CHIFF 2 83 67 16 N –

492 VARIOUS GT SYNTH-LEAD 2 84 68 16 N –

493 VARIOUS VOX LEAD 2 85 65 16 N –

494 VARIOUS BASS LEAD 3 87 65 16 N –

495 VARIOUS SINE SYNTH 89 65 16 N –

496 VARIOUS SOPRANO PAD 89 68 16 N –

497 VARIOUS FAST SWEEP 95 66 16 N –

498 VARIOUS WOOD PAD 96 66 16 N –

499 VARIOUS SYNTH-MALLET 98 65 16 N –

Appendix

735A-E–123A

No. Tone Group Tone Name Program

Change

Bank Select

MSB

Maximum

Polyphony

Range

Type DSP Type

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM9

A-10

Drum Sets

500 DRUM STANDARD SET 1 0 120

501 DRUM STANDARD SET 2 1 120

502 DRUM ROOM SET 8 120

503 DRUM POWER SET 16 120

504 DRUM ELEC. SET 24 120

505 DRUM SYNTH SET 1 25 120

506 DRUM SYNTH SET 2 30 120

507 DRUM JAZZ SET 32 120

508 DRUM BRUSH SET 40 120

509 DRUM ORCHESTRA SET 48 120

510 DRUM HIP-HOP SET 1 64 120

511 DRUM HIP-HOP SET 2 65 120

512 DRUM TECHNO SET 1 66 120

513 DRUM TECHNO SET 2 67 120

514 DRUM DANCE SET 1 68 120

515 DRUM DANCE SET 2 69 120

Drawbar Organ Tones

0 DRAWBAR Drawbar Organ 1 0 96 10 N Rotary

1 DRAWBAR Jazz Organ 1 1 96 10 N Rotary

2 DRAWBAR Full Drawbar 2 96 16 N Rotary

3 DRAWBAR Perc. Organ 1 3 96 16 N Rotary

4 DRAWBAR 16’+1’ Organ 4 96 16 N Rotary

5 DRAWBAR Soul Organ 1 5 96 10 N Rotary

6 DRAWBAR Overdrive Organ 1 6 96 16 N OvdRotry

7 DRAWBAR Drawbar Organ 2 7 96 16 N Rotary

8 DRAWBAR Block Organ 1 8 96 16 N OvdRotry

9 DRAWBAR Theater Organ 1 9 96 16 N Rotary

10 DRAWBAR Jazz Organ 2 10 96 10 N Rotary

11 DRAWBAR Soul Organ 2 11 96 16 N Rotary

12 DRAWBAR Gospel Organ 1 12 96 16 N Rotary

13 DRAWBAR Chorus Organ 1 13 96 16 N Rotary

14 DRAWBAR Overdrive Organ 2 14 96 10 N OvdRotry

15 DRAWBAR Block Organ 2 15 96 16 N Rotary

16 DRAWBAR Drawbar Organ 3 16 96 16 N Rotary

17 DRAWBAR Perc. Organ 2 17 96 16 N Rotary

18 DRAWBAR Theater Organ 2 18 96 16 N Rotary

19 DRAWBAR Gospel Organ 2 19 96 16 N Rotary

20 DRAWBAR Even Organ 20 96 16 N Rotary

21 DRAWBAR Flute Organ 1 21 96 16 N Rotary

22 DRAWBAR Chorus Organ 2 22 96 16 N Rotary

23 DRAWBAR Overdrive Organ 3 23 96 16 N Rotary

24 DRAWBAR 16’ Organ 24 96 16 N Rotary

25 DRAWBAR Soul Organ 3 25 96 16 N Rotary

26 DRAWBAR Perc. Organ 3 26 96 16 N Rotary

27 DRAWBAR Drawbar Organ 4 27 96 16 N Rotary

28 DRAWBAR Perc. Organ 4 28 96 10 N Rotary

29 DRAWBAR Odd Organ 29 96 16 N Rotary

30 DRAWBAR Reed Organ 1 30 96 16 N Rotary

31 DRAWBAR Block Organ 3 31 96 10 N Rotary

735A-E–124A

Appendix

No. Tone Group Tone Name Program

Change

Bank Select

MSB

No. Tone Group Tone Name Program

Change

Bank Select

MSB

Maximum

Polyphony

Range

Type DSP Type

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM10

A-11

32 DRAWBAR Overdrive Organ 4 32 96 10 N OvdRotry

33 DRAWBAR Drawbar Organ 5 33 96 10 N Rotary

34 DRAWBAR Gospel Organ 3 34 96 16 N Rotary

35 DRAWBAR 8’ + 4’ Organ 35 96 32 N Rotary

36 DRAWBAR Block Organ 4 36 96 32 N Rotary

37 DRAWBAR String Organ 2 37 96 16 N Rotary

38 DRAWBAR Pure Organ 1 38 96 32 N Rotary

39 DRAWBAR Drawbar Organ 6 39 96 10 N Rotary

40 DRAWBAR Delay Organ 1 40 96 10 N StXDly 2

41 DRAWBAR Deep Chorus Organ 41 96 32 N Cho.Dly4

42 DRAWBAR Tremolo Organ 42 96 16 N Cho.Trem

43 DRAWBAR Delay Organ 2 43 96 16 N Cho.Dly6

44 DRAWBAR LFO Wah Organ 44 96 16 N LWhChDl2

45 DRAWBAR Dist. Organ Lead 45 96 16 N MetalDly

46 DRAWBAR Ring Organ 46 96 16 N RingMod2

47 DRAWBAR Mad Rotary Organ 47 96 10 N RgChDly2

48 DRAWBAR Old Organ 48 96 16 N LoFiRef2

49 DRAWBAR Dist. Ring Organ 49 96 10 N DistRing

NOTE

Range

Symbol Meaning

N Normal

–1 1 Octave Down

–2 2 Octave Down

1 1 Octave Up

2 2 Octave Up

1/2 1/2 Octave

1/4 1/4 Octave

735A-E–125A

Appendix

No. Tone Group Tone Name Program

Change

Bank Select

MSB

Maximum

Polyphony

Range

Type DSP Type

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM11

A-12

Appendix

735A-E–126A

Drum Assignment List

“ ” indicates the same sound as STANDARD SET.

➝

Key/

Note number

PC0: STANDARD SET 1

—

HIGH Q

SLAP

SCRATCH PUSH

SCRATCH PULL

STICKS

SQUARE CLICK

METRONOME CLICK

METRONOME BELL

STANDARD 1 KICK 2

STANDARD 1 KICK 1

SIDE STICK

STANDARD 1 SNARE 1

HAND CLAP

STANDARD 1 SNARE 2

LOW TOM 2

CLOSED HI-HAT

LOW TOM 1

PEDAL HI-HAT

MID TOM 2

OPEN HI-HAT

MID TOM 1

HIGH TOM 2

CRASH CYMBAL 1

HIGH TOM 1

RIDE CYMBAL 1

CHINESE CYMBAL

RIDE BELL

TAMBOURINE

SPLASH CYMBAL

COWBELL

CRASH CYMBAL 2

VIBRA-SLAP

RIDE CYMBAL 2

HIGH BONGO

LOW BONGO

MUTE HIGH CONGA

OPEN HIGH CONGA

LOW CONGA

HIGH TIMBALE

LOW TIMBALE

HIGH AGOGO

LOW AGOGO

CABASA

MARACAS

SHORT HI WHISTLE

LONG LOW WHISTLE

SHORT GUIRO

LONG GUIRO

CLAVES

HIGH WOOD BLOCK

LOW WOOD BLOCK

MUTE CUICA

OPEN CUICA

MUTE TRIANGLE

OPEN TRIANGLE

SHAKER

JINGLE BELL

BELL TREE

CASTANETS

MUTE SURDO

OPEN SURDO

APPLAUSE

—

씯

STANDARD 2 KICK 2

STANDARD 2 KICK 1

씯

STANDARD 1 SNARE 1

SYNTH HAND CLAP

STANDARD 1 SNARE 2

씯

—

씯

ROOM KICK 2

ROOM KICK 1

씯

ROOM SNARE 1

씯

ROOM SNARE 2

ROOM LOW TOM 2

씯

ROOM LOW TOM 1

씯

ROOM MID TOM 2

씯

ROOM MID TOM 1

ROOM HI TOM 2

씯

ROOM HI TOM 1

씯

—

PC1: STANDARD SET 2

PC8: ROOM SET

100

101

103

105

107

108

110

112

C#1

E 1

F#1

A 1

B 1

C#2

E 2

F#2

A 2

B 2

C#3

E 3

F#3

A 3

B 3

C#4

E 4

F#4

A 4

B 4

C#5

E 5

F#5

A 5

B 5

C#6

E 6

F#6

A 6

B 6

C#7

E 7

F#7

A 7

B 7

C#8

E 8

102

104

106

109

111



PC24: ELEC SET PC25: SYNTH 1 PC30: SYNTH 2 PC32: JAZZ SET

PC16: POWER SET

—

씯

POWER KICK 2

POWER KICK 1

씯

POWER SNARE 1

씯

POWER SNARE 2

ROOM LOW TOM 2

씯

ROOM LOW TOM 1

씯

ROOM MID TOM 2

씯

ROOM MID TOM 1

ROOM HI TOM 2

씯

ROOM HI TOM 1

씯

—

씯

SYNTH 1 KICK 1

SYNTH 1 KICK 2

SYNTH 1 RIM SHOT

SYNTH 1 SNARE 1

SYNTH HAND CLAP

SYNTH 1 SNARE 2

SYNTH 1 LOW TOM 2

SYNTH 1 CHH 1

SYNTH 1 LOW TOM 1

SYNTH 1 CHH 2

SYNTH 1 MID TOM 2

SYNTH 1 OHH

SYNTH 1 MID TOM 1

SYNTH 1 HI TOM 2

SYNTH 1 CYMBAL

SYNTH 1 HI TOM 1

씯

SYNTH 1 COWBELL

씯

SYNTH 1 HIGH CONGA

SYNTH 1 MID CONGA

SYNTH 1 LOW CONGA

씯

SYNTH 1 MARACAS

씯

SYNTH 1 CLAVES

씯

—

씯

SYNTH 2 KICK 1

SYNTH 2 KICK 2

씯

SYNTH 2 SNARE 1

씯

SYNTH 2 SNARE 2

씯

SYNTH 1 COWBELL

씯

SYNTH 1 HIGH CONGA

SYNTH 1 MID CONGA

SYNTH 1 LOW CONGA

씯

SYNTH 1 MARACAS

씯

SYNTH 1 CLAVES

씯

—

씯

ELEC KICK 2

ELEC KICK 1

씯

ELEC SNARE 1

씯

ELEC SNARE 2

ELEC LOW TOM 2

씯

ELEC LOW TOM 1

씯

ELEC MID TOM 2

씯

ELEC MID TOM 1

ELEC HI TOM 2

씯

ELEC HI TOM 1

씯

REVERSE CYMBAL

씯

—

씯

JAZZ KICK 2

JAZZ KICK 1

씯

JAZZ SNARE 1

씯

JAZZ SNARE 2

씯

—

Program Change No. / Drum Set Name

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM12

A-13

PC40: BRUSH SET

—

씯

JAZZ KICK 2

JAZZ KICK 1

씯

BRUSH TAP

BRUSH SLAP

BRUSH SWIRL

씯

—

CLOSED HI-HAT

PEDAL HI-HAT

OPEN HI-HAT

RIDE CYMBAL 1

씯

JAZZ KICK 1

CONCERT BASS DRUM

씯

CONCERT SNARE

CASTANETS

CONCERT SNARE

TIMPANI F



TIMPANI G

TIMPANI A



TIMPANI A

TIMPANI B



TIMPANI B

TIMPANI C



TIMPANI D

TIMPANI E



TIMPANI E

TIMPANI F

씯

CONCERT CYMBAL 2

씯

CONCERT CYMBAL 1

씯

—

WHITE NOISE

LOOPED

BEEP 1

BEEP 2

씯

HIP-HOP SCRACH 1

HIP-HOP SCRACH 2

씯

HIP-HOP KICK 2

HIP-HOP KICK 1

씯

HIP-HOP SNARE 1

HAND CLAP 2

HIP-HOP SNARE 2

씯

HIP-HOP CHH

씯

HIP-HOP PHH

씯

HIP-HOP OHH

씯

HIP-HOP CLASH

씯

HIP-HOP RIDE

씯

ELEC KICK 1

SYNTH 1 KICK 1

SYNTH 1 KICK 2

DANCE KICK 3

TECHNO KICK 1

HIP-HOP BD 5

HIP-HOP BD 6

TECHNO KICK 4

DANCE KICK 2

DANCE KICK 1

DANCE KICK 5

DANCE KICK 6

POWER SNARE 2

SYNTH 1 SNARE 1

SYNTH 1 SNARE 2

SYNTH 2 SNARE 1

SYNTH 2 SNARE 2

HIP-HOP SNARE 5

HIP-HOP SNARE 6

TECHNO SNARE 3

TECHNO SNARE 5

TECHNO SNARE 6

DANCE SNARE 4

DANCE SNARE 5

PC48: ORCHESTRA SET

PC64: HIP-HOP SET 1

100

101

103

105

107

108

110

112

C#1

E 1

F#1

A 1

B 1

C#2

E 2

F#2

A 2

B 2

C#3

E 3

F#3

A 3

B 3

C#4

E 4

F#4

A 4

B 4

C#5

E 5

F#5

A 5

B 5

C#6

E 6

F#6

A 6

B 6

C#7

E 7

F#7

A 7

B 7

C#8

E 8

102

104

106

109

111



PC66: TECHNO SET 1 PC67: TECHNO SET 2

PC68: DANCE SET 1

PC69: DANCE SET 2

PC65: HIP-HOP SET 2

WHITE NOISE

LOOPED

BEEP 1

BEEP 2

씯

HIP-HOP SCRACH 1

HIP-HOP SCRACH 2

씯

HIP-HOP KICK 4

HIP-HOP KICK 3

씯

HIP-HOP SNARE 3

HAND CLAP 2

HIP-HOP SNARE 4

SYNTH 2 LOW TOM 2

HIP-HOP CHH

SYNTH 2 LOW TOM 1

HIP-HOP PHH

SYNTH 2 MID TOM 2

HIP-HOP OHH

SYNTH 2 MID TOM 1

SYNTH 2 HI TOM 2

SYNTH 2 CYMBAL

SYNTH 2 HI TOM 1

SYNTH 2 RIDE

씯

ELEC KICK 1

SYNTH 1 KICK 1

SYNTH 1 KICK 2

DANCE KICK 3

TECHNO KICK 1

HIP-HOP BD 5

HIP-HOP BD 6

TECHNO KICK 4

DANCE KICK 2

DANCE KICK 1

DANCE KICK 5

DANCE KICK 6

POWER SNARE 2

SYNTH 1 SNARE 1

SYNTH 1 SNARE 2

SYNTH 2 SNARE 1

SYNTH 2 SNARE 2

HIP-HOP SNARE 5

HIP-HOP SNARE 6

TECHNO SNARE 3

TECHNO SNARE 5

TECHNO SNARE 6

DANCE SNARE 4

DANCE SNARE 5

WHITE NOISE

LOOPED

BEEP 1

BEEP 2

씯

HIP-HOP SCRACH 1

HIP-HOP SCRACH 2

씯

TECHNO KICK 4

TECHNO KICK 3

SYNTH 1 RIM SHOT

TECHNO SNARE 3

HAND CLAP 3

TECHNO SNARE 4

SYNTH 1 LOW TOM 2

TECHNO CHH 1

SYNTH 1 LOW TOM 1

TECHNO PHH

SYNTH 1 MID TOM 2

TECHNO OHH

SYNTH 1 MID TOM 1

SYNTH 1 HI TOM 2

TECHNO CYMBAL

SYNTH 1 HI TOM 1

TECHNO CYMBAL

씯

ELEC KICK 1

SYNTH 1 KICK 1

SYNTH 1 KICK 2

DANCE KICK 3

TECHNO KICK 1

HIP-HOP BD 5

HIP-HOP BD 6

TECHNO KICK 4

DANCE KICK 2

DANCE KICK 1

DANCE KICK 5

DANCE KICK 6

POWER SNARE 2

SYNTH 1 SNARE 1

SYNTH 1 SNARE 2

SYNTH 2 SNARE 1

SYNTH 2 SNARE 2

HIP-HOP SNARE 5

HIP-HOP SNARE 6

TECHNO SNARE 3

TECHNO SNARE 5

TECHNO SNARE 6

DANCE SNARE 4

DANCE SNARE 5

WHITE NOISE

LOOPED

BEEP 1

BEEP 2

씯

HIP-HOP SCRACH 1

HIP-HOP SCRACH 2

씯

DANCE KICK 2

SYNTH 1 RIM SHOT

DANCE SNARE 1

HAND CLAP 3

DANCE SNARE 2

씯

SYNTH 2 CHH

씯

SYNTH 2 PHH

씯

SYNTH 2 OHH

씯

HIP-HOP CLASH

씯

HIP-HOP RIDE

씯

ELEC KICK 1

SYNTH 1 KICK 1

SYNTH 1 KICK 2

DANCE KICK 3

TECHNO KICK 1

HIP-HOP BD 5

HIP-HOP BD 6

TECHNO KICK 4

DANCE KICK 2

DANCE KICK 1

DANCE KICK 5

DANCE KICK 6

POWER SNARE 2

SYNTH 1 SNARE 1

SYNTH 1 SNARE 2

SYNTH 2 SNARE 1

SYNTH 2 SNARE 2

HIP-HOP SNARE 5

HIP-HOP SNARE 6

TECHNO SNARE 3

TECHNO SNARE 5

TECHNO SNARE 6

DANCE SNARE 4

DANCE SNARE 5

WHITE NOISE

LOOPED

BEEP 1

BEEP 2

씯

HIP-HOP SCRACH 1

HIP-HOP SCRACH 2

씯

TECHNO KICK 2

TECHNO KICK 1

SYNTH 1 RIM SHOT

TECHNO SNARE 1

HAND CLAP 3

TECHNO SNARE 2

SYNTH 1 LOW TOM 2

SYNTH 1 CHH

SYNTH 1 LOW TOM 1

SYNTH 1 PHH

SYNTH 1 MID TOM 2

SYNTH 1 OHH

SYNTH 1 MID TOM 1

SYNTH 1 HI TOM 2

SYNTH 1 CYMBAL

SYNTH 1 HI TOM 1

SYNTH 1 RIDE

씯

ELEC KICK 1

SYNTH 1 KICK 1

SYNTH 1 KICK 2

DANCE KICK 3

TECHNO KICK 1

HIP-HOP BD 5

HIP-HOP BD 6

TECHNO KICK 4

DANCE KICK 2

DANCE KICK 1

DANCE KICK 5

DANCE KICK 6

POWER SNARE 2

SYNTH 1 SNARE 1

SYNTH 1 SNARE 2

SYNTH 2 SNARE 1

SYNTH 2 SNARE 2

HIP-HOP SNARE 5

HIP-HOP SNARE 6

TECHNO SNARE 3

TECHNO SNARE 5

TECHNO SNARE 6

DANCE SNARE 4

DANCE SNARE 5

WHITE NOISE

LOOPED

BEEP 1

BEEP 2

씯

HIP-HOP SCRACH 1

HIP-HOP SCRACH 2

씯

DANCE KICK 4

DANCE KICK 3

SYNTH 1 RIM SHOT

DANCE SNARE 3

HAND CLAP 3

DANCE SNARE 4

SYNTH 2 LOW TOM 2

HIP-HOP CHH

SYNTH 2 LOW TOM 1

HIP-HOP PHH

SYNTH 2 MID TOM 2

HIP-HOP OHH

SYNTH 2 MID TOM 1

SYNTH 2 HI TOM 2

TECHNO CYMBAL

SYNTH 2 HI TOM 1

TECHNO CYMBAL

씯

ELEC KICK 1

SYNTH 1 KICK 1

SYNTH 1 KICK 2

DANCE KICK 3

TECHNO KICK 1

HIP-HOP BD 5

HIP-HOP BD 6

TECHNO KICK 4

DANCE KICK 2

DANCE KICK 1

DANCE KICK 5

DANCE KICK 6

POWER SNARE 2

SYNTH 1 SNARE 1

SYNTH 1 SNARE 2

SYNTH 2 SNARE 1

SYNTH 2 SNARE 2

HIP-HOP SNARE 5

HIP-HOP SNARE 6

TECHNO SNARE 3

TECHNO SNARE 5

TECHNO SNARE 6

DANCE SNARE 4

DANCE SNARE 5

Key/

Note number

Program Change No. / Drum Set Name



Appendix

735A-E–127A

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM13

A-14

No. Rhythm Name

8 BEAT

0 8 BEAT 1

1 8 BEAT 2

2 8 BEAT 3

3 8 BEAT POP 1

4 8 BEAT POP 2

5 8 BEAT POP 3

660’S SOUL

7 8 BEAT DANCE

8 POP ROCK 1

9 POP ROCK 2

16 BEAT

10 16 BEAT 1

11 16 BEAT 2

12 16 BEAT 3

13 SLOW 16 BEAT

14 16 BEAT SHUFFLE 1

15 16 BEAT SHUFFLE 1

16 FUNK 1

17 FUNK 2

18 FUSION

19 LATIN FUSION

POPS

20 POP

21 SOUL

22 POP SHUFFLE 1

23 POP SHUFFLE 2

24 SOUL POP

25 WORLD POP

26 MELLOW R&B

27 60’S POP

28 80’S POP

29 POP WALTZ

BALLAD

30 8 BEAT BALLAD 1

31 8 BEAT BALLAD 2

32 8 BEAT BALLAD 3

33 16 BEAT BALLAD 1

34 16 BEAT BALLAD 2

35 16 BEAT BALLAD 3

36 6/8 BALLAD

37 POP BALLAD

38 OLDIES BALLAD

39 SERENADE

ROCK

40 ROCK 1

41 ROCK 2

42 R&B

43 SHUFFLE ROCK

44 SLOW ROCK

45 HEAVY METAL

46 60’S ROCK

47 SHUFFLE BOOGIE

48 BLUES

49 TWIST

DANCE

50 TRANCE 1

51 TRANCE 2

52 AMBIENT 1

53 AMBIENT 2

54 AMBIENT 3

55 RAVE

56 TECHNO

57 DIGITAL ROCK

58 HOUSE

59 LATIN HOUSE

60 DANCE 1

61 DANCE 2

62 MODERN R&B

63 HIP-HOP

64 TRIP-HOP

65 ELECTRIC POP

66 DANCE POP 1

67 DANCE POP 2

68 DANCE POP 3

69 DISCO SOUL

JAZZ

70 FAST BIG BAND

71 MIDDLE BIG BAND

72 SLOW BIG BAND

73 JAZZ COMBO

74 SWING

75 SLOW SWING

76 MODERAN JAZZ

77 FOX TROT

78 QUICKSTEP

79 JAZZ WALTZ

EUROPEAN

80 POLKA

81 POLKA FOX

82 POP POLKA

83 1.Mar

84 2.Mar

85 GERMAN MARCH

86 WALTZ 1

87 WALTZ 2

88 VINNESE WALTZ

89 FRENCH WALTZ

LATIN/VARIOUS

90 BOSSA NOVA 1

91 BOSSA NOVA 2

92 SAMBA

93 MERENGUE

94 CUMBIA

95 CHA-CHA-CHA

96 SALSA

97 BEGUINE

98 BOLERO

99 MAMBO

100 RHUMBA

101 TANGO 1

102 TANGO 2

103 REGGAE 1

104 REGGAE 2

105 SKA

106 BLUEGRASS

107 COUNTRY

108 COUNTRY SHUFFLE

109 COUNTRY WALTZ

110 FAST GOSPEL

111 SLOW GOSPEL

112 BROADWAY

113 JIVE

114 DIXIE

115 PASODOBLE

116 SIRTAKI

117 HAWAIAN

118 ADANI

119 BALADI

FOR PIANO

120 PIANO BALLAD 1

121 PIANO BALLAD 2

122 PIANO BALLAD 3

123 EP BALLAD 1

124 EP BALLAD 2

125 BLUES BALLAD

126 MELLOW JAZZ

127 JAZZ COMBO 2

128 RAGTIME

129 BOOGIE WOOGIE

130 ARPEGGIO 1

131 ARPEGGIO 2

132 ARPEGGIO 3

133 PIANO BALLAD 4

134 6/8 MARCH

135 3.Mar

136 2 BEAT

137 WALTZ 3

138 WALTZ 4

139 WALTZ 5

Rhythm List

Appendix

735A-E–128A

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM14

A-15

Fingered Chord Chart

dim m7-5

Mm7m7 dim7

Chord

Type

Root

C /(D )





(D )/E





F /(G )





(G )/A





(A )/B





* You can use the above fingerings to finger chords within the accompaniment keyboard range.

Appendix

735A-E–129A

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM15

A-16

aug sus4

C /(D )





(D )/E





F /(G )





(G )/A





(A )/B





m add9

7sus4 mM7 7

-5

add9

Chord

Type

Root

Appendix

735A-E–130A

WK3000_e_A-01-16.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM16

A-17

Appendix

735A-E-131A

REVERB Effect List

Effect List

CHORUS Effect List DSP Effect List

Settable parameters depend on the DSP type. Also,

the parameters for each DSP type depend on the

algorithm* associated with the DSP type. See the DSP

Algorithm List on page A-19 for more information.

*Effector structure and operation type

No. Display Name Type Name

00 Chorus 1 Chorus 1

01 Chorus 2 Chorus 2

02 Chorus 3 Chorus 3

03 Chorus 4 Chorus 4

04 FBChorus

Feedback Chorus

05 Flanger1 Flanger 1

06 SDelay 1 Short Delay 1

07 SDelay 2 Short Delay 2

08 SFChorus Soft Chorus

09 BRChorus Bright Chorus

10 DPChorus Deep Chorus

11 Flanger 2 Flanger 2

12 Flanger 3 Flanger 3

13 Flanger 4 Flanger 4

14 SDelay 3 Short Delay 3

15 SDelay 4 Short Delay 4

No. Display Name Type Name

00 Room 1 Room 1

01 Room 2 Room 2

02 Room 3 Room 3

03 Hall 1 Hall 1

04 Hall 2 Hall 2

05 Plate 1 Plate 1

06 Delay Delay

07 PanDelay Pan Delay

08 Plate 2 Plate 2

09 Plate 3 Plate 3

10 LrgRoom 1 Large Room 1

11 LrgRoom 2 Large Room 2

12 Stadium 1 Stadium 1

13 Stadium 2 Stadium 2

14 LongDly 1 Long Delay 1

15 LongDly 2 Long Delay 2

DSP

Algorithm

Display DSP Name

No. ID Name

Dynamics Fx

[00] 03 Equalize Equalizer

[01] 06 Comp 1 Compressor 1

[02] 06 Comp 2 Compressor 2

[03] 07 Limiter Limiter

[04] 13 Enhancer Enhancer Phaser

Phaser

[05] 10 Phaser Phaser

[06] 09 StPhaser Stereo Phaser

Chorus

[07] 16 Chorus 1 Chorus 1

[08] 17 Chorus 2 Chorus 2

[09] 19 Chorus 3 Chorus 3

[10] 18 Chorus 4 Chorus 4

[11] M05 Enha Cho Enhancer - Chorus

Flanger

[12] 26 Flanger Flanger

[13] M07 EnhaFlan Enhancer - Flanger

Equalizer List

No. Display Name Type Name

0 Standard Standard

1 Bass + Bass +

2 Treble + Treble +

3 Loundness Loundness

4 Mellow Mellow

5 Bright Bright

6 Rock Rock

7 Dance Dance

8 Jazz Jazz

9 Classic Classic

WK3000_e_A-17-18.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM17

A-18

Appendix

735A-E-132A

DSP

Algorithm

Display DSP Name

No. ID Name

DSP

Algorithm

Display DSP Name

No. ID Name

DSP

Algorithm

Display DSP Name

No. ID Name

Delay

[14] 28 Delay Delay

[15] 22 3Tap Dly 3-Tap Delay

[16] 20 St Delay Stereo Delay

[17] 21 StXDelay Stereo Cross Delay

[18] M06 Enha Dly Enhancer - Delay

[19] 25 Reflect Reflection

Cho/Flanger/Delay Combination

[20] M02 PhaCho 1 Phaser - Chorus 1

[21] M02 PhaCho 2 Phaser - Chorus 2

[22] M04 PhaDly 1 Phaser - Delay 1

[23] M04 PhaDly 2 Phaser - Delay 2

[24] M00 ChoDly 1 Chorus - Delay 1

[25] M00 ChoDly 2 Chorus - Delay 2

[26] M01 ChoDly 3 Chorus - Delay 3

[27] M01 ChoDly 4 Chorus - Delay 4

[28] M19 CmpDelay Compressor - Delay

[29] M18

CmpEnDly

Compressor - Enhancer -Delay

[30] M23

CmpChoRf

Compressor - Chorus -Reflection

[31] M08 Cho Flan Chorus - Flanger

[32] M03 FlanDly 1 Flanger - Delay 1

[33] M03 FlanDly 2 Flanger - Delay 2

Reverb

[34] 27

RvbRoom1

Reverb Room 1

[35] 27

RvbRoom2

Reverb Room 2

[36] 27

RvbRoom3

Reverb Room 3

[37] 27 RvbHall 1 Reverb Hall 1

[38] 27 RvbHall 2 Reverb Hall 2

[39] 27 RvbPlate Reverb Plate

[40] 23

GateRvb 1

Gate Reverb 1

[41] 23

GateRvb 2

Gate Reverb 2

[42] 24

GateRvb 3

Gate Reverb 3

[43] 24

GateRvb 4

Gate Reverb 4

[72] M30 Crn Cho Crunch - Chorus

[73] M30 OdChorus Overdrive - Chorus

[74] M30 Dist Cho Distortion - Chorus

[75] M30 MetalCho Metal - Chorus

[76] M31 DistFlan Distortion - Flanger

[77] M31 Met Flan Metal - Flanger

[78] M28 CrnDelay Crunch - Delay

[79] M28 Od Delay Overdrive - Delay

[80] M28 DistDly 1 Distortion - Delay 1

[81] M28 DistDly 2 Distortion - Delay 2

[82] M28 MetalDly Metal - Delay

[83] M28 Fuzz Dly Fuzz - Delay

[84] M24 CrChoDly

Crunch - Chorus - Delay

[85] M24

DsChoDly

Distortion - Chorus - Delay

[86] M25

CmpCrDly

Compressor - Crunch - Delay

[87] M26

AWhCrDly

Auto Wah - Crunch - Delay

[88] M26

AWhOdDly

Auto Wah - Overdrive - Delay

[89] M26

AWhDsDly

Auto Wah - Distortion - Delay

[90] M27

LWhOdDly

LFO Wah - Overdrive - Delay

[91] M27

LWhDsDly

LFO Wah - Distortion - Delay

SFX

[92] 14 Ring Mod Ring Modulator

[93] M12

RgChoDly

Ring Modulator - Chorus - Delay

[94] M13 RingDist

Ring Modulator - Distortion

[95] 15 Lo-Fi Lo-Fi

[96] M11

CompLoFi

Compressor - Lo-Fi

[97] M14 LoFi Ref Lo-Fi - Reflection

[98] M15 Crn LoFi Crunch - Lo-Fi

[99] M15 DistLoFi Distortion - Lo-Fi

Pan/Tremolo Fx

[44] 01 Tremolo Tremolo

[45] M09 Cho Trem Chorus - Tremolo

[46] 00 Auto Pan Auto Pan

[47] M10

PhaAPan 1

Phaser - Auto Pan 1

[48] M10

PhaAPan 2

Phaser - Auto Pan 2

[49] M20

PhaChoAP

Phaser - Chorus - Auto Pan

Rotary Fx

[50] 11 Rotary 1 Rotary 1

[51] 11 Rotary 2 Rotary 2

[52] 12 Od Rot 1 Overdrive - Rotary 1

[53] 12 Od Rot 2 Overdrive - Rotary 2

[54] M17 RotRef 1 Rotary - Reflection 1

[55] M17 RotRef 2 Rotary - Reflection 2

[56] M17 RotRef 3 Rotary - Reflection 3

[57] M16

OdRtRef 1

Overdrive - Rotary - Reflection 1

[58] M16

OdRtRef 2

Overdrive - Rotary - Reflection 2

[59] M16

OdRtRef 3

Overdrive - Rotary - Reflection 3

Wah Fx

[60] 04 LFO Wah LFO Wah

[61] 05 Auto Wah Auto Wah

[62] M21

AWhChDly

Auto Wah - Chorus - Delay

[63] M22

LWhChDly

LFO Wah - Chorus - Delay

Guitar Fx

[64] 08 Crunch Crunch

[65] 08 Ovrdrive Overdrive

[66] 08 Dist 1 Distortion 1

[67] 08 Dist 2 Distortion 2

[68] 08 Metal Metal

[69] 08 Fuzz Fuzz

[70] M29 CrnPhase Crunch - Phaser

[71] M29 Od Phase Overdrive - Phaser

WK3000_e_A-17-18.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM18

A-19

735A-E-133A

Appendix

DSP Algorithm List

00 : Auto Pan

■

Function

Continually performs left-right panning of the

input signal in accordance with an LFO.

■

Parameters

0 : Rate (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the panning rate.

1 : Depth (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the panning depth.

01 : Tremolo

■

Function

Adjusts volume of input signal in accordance

with an LFO.

■

Parameters

0 : Rate (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the tremolo rate.

1 : Depth (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the tremolo depth.

02 : 2BandEQ

■

Function

This is a two-band equalizer.

■

Parameters

0 : Low Frequency (Range: 0 (200Hz), 1 (400Hz),

2 (800Hz))

Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the low-band

equalizer.

1 :

Low Gain (Range: -12, -11, -10 to 0 to +10, +11, +12)

Adjusts the gain of the low-band equalizer.

2 : High Frequency (Range: 0 (6.0KHz), 1

(8.0KHz), 2 (10KHz))

Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the high-band

equalizer.

3 :

High Gain (Range: -12, -11, -10 to 0 to +10, +11, +12)

Adjusts the gain of the high-band equalizer.

03 : 3BandEQ

■

Function

This is a three-band equalizer.

■

Parameters

0 : Low Frequency (Range: 0 (200Hz), 1 (400Hz),

2 (800Hz))

Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the low-band

equalizer.

1 : Low Gain (Range: -12, -11, -10 to 0 to +10, +11,

+12)

Adjusts the gain of the low-band equalizer.

2 : Mid Frequency (Range: 0 (1.0KHz), 1 (1.3KHz),

2 (1.6KHz), 3 (2.0KHz), 4 (3.0KHz), 5 (4.0KHz),

6 (6.0KHz), 7 (8.0KHz))

Adjusts the center frequency of the mid-band

equalizer.

3 : Mid Gain (Range: -12, -11, -10 to 0 to +10, +11,

+12)

Adjusts the gain of the mid-band equalizer.

4 : High Frequency (Range: 0 (6.0KHz), 1

(8.0KHz), 2 (10KHz))

Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the high-band

equalizer.

5 : High Gain (Range: -12, -11, -10 to 0 to +10, +11,

+12)

Adjusts the gain of the high-band equalizer.

04 : LFO Wah

■

Function

This is a “wah” effect that can automatically

affect the frequency in accordance with an LFO.

■

Parameters

0 : Input Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the input level. The input signal can

become distorted when the level of the sound

being input, the number of chords, or the Reso-

nance value is large. Adjust this parameter to

eliminate such distortion.

1 : Resonance (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the resonance of the sound.

2 : Manual (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the frequency used as the basis for the

wah filter.

3 : LFO Rate (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the rate of the LFO.

4 : LFO Depth (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the depth of the LFO.

05 : Auto Wah

■

Function

This is a “wah” effect that can automatically

affect the frequency in accordance with the

level of the input signal.

■

Parameters

0 : Input Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the input level. The input signal can

become distorted when the level of the sound

being input, the number of chords, or the Reso-

nance value is large. Adjust this parameter to

eliminate such distortion.

1 : Resonance (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the resonance of the sound.

2 : Manual (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the frequency used as the basis for the

wah filter.

WK3000_e_A-19-31.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM19

A-20

Appendix

735A-E-134A

3 : Depth(Range: -64 to 0 to +63)

Adjusts the depth of the wah in accordance

with the level of the input signal.

Setting a positive value causes the wah filter

to open in direct proportion with the size of

the input signal, producing a bright sound.

Setting a negative value causes the Wah filter

to close in accordance with the size of the in-

put signal, which produces a dark tone qual-

ity. However, large input re-opens the Wah fil-

ter, even if it is closed.

06 : Compressor

■

Function

Compresses the input signal, which can have

the effect of suppressing level variation and

making it possible to sustain dampened

sounds longer.

■

Parameters

0 : Depth (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts compression of the audio signal.

1 : Attack (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the attack amount of the input signal.

A smaller value causes prompt compressor

operation, which suppresses the attack of the

input signal.

A larger values delays compressor operation,

which causes attack to be output as-is.

2 : Release (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the time from the point when the in-

put signal drops below a certain level until the

compression operation is stopped.

When an attack feeling is desired (no compres-

sion at the onset of the sound), set this param-

eter to as low a value as possible.

To have compression applied at all times, set a

high value.

3 : Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the output level.

The output volume changes in accordance with

the Depth setting and the characteristics of the

input tone. Use this parameter to correct for

such changes.

07 : Limiter

■

Function

This is an effector that you can use to set an

upper limit value on the level of the input sig-

nal.

■

Parameters

0 : Limit (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the volume level from which the limit

is applied.

1 : Attack (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the attack amount of the input signal.

2 : Release (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the time from when the input signal

drops below a certain level until the limit op-

eration stops.

3 : Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level being output.

The output volume changes in accordance with

the Limit setting and the characteristics of the

input tone. Use this parameter to correct for

such changes.

08 : Distortion

■

Function

This effect provides Distortion +

AmpSimulator.

■

Parameters

0 : Gain (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the input gain.

1 : Low (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the low-band gain.

The cutoff frequency differs according to the

preset DSP.

2 : High (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the high-band gain.

The cutoff frequency differs according to the

preset DSP.

3 : Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the output level.

09 : Stereo Phaser

■

Function

This is a stereo phaser that modulates the phase

in accordance with a sine wave LFO.

■

Parameters

0 : Resonance (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the resonance of the sound.

1 : Manual (Range: -64 to 0 to +63)

Adjusts the phaser shift volume, which is used

for reference.

2 : Rate (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the rate of the LFO.

3 : Depth (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the depth of the LFO.

4 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the volume level of the effect.

10 : Phaser

■

Function

This is a monaural phaser that modulates the

phase in accordance with a sine wave LFO.

■

Parameters

0 : Resonance (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the resonance of the sound.

1 : Manual (Range: -64 to 0 to +63)

Adjusts the phaser shift volume, which is used

for reference.

WK3000_e_A-19-31.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM20

A-21

2 : Rate (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the rate of the LFO.

3 : Depth (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the depth of the LFO.

4 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

11 : Rotary

■

Function

This is a rotary speaker simulator.

■

Parameters

0 : Speed (Range: Slow, Fast)

Switches the speed mode between fast and

slow.

1 : Break (Range: Rotate, Stop)

Stops speaker rotation.

2 : Fall Accel (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is

switched from fast to slow.

3 : Rise Accel (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is

switched from slow to fast.

4 : Slow Rate (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts speaker rotation speed of the slow

speed mode.

5 : Fast Rate (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts speaker rotation speed of the fast speed

mode.

12 : Drive Rotary

■

Function

This is an overdrive - rotary speaker simula-

tor.

■

Parameters

0 : Overdrive Gain (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts overdrive gain.

1 : Overdrive Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the output level of the overdrive.

2 : Speed(Range: Slow, Fast)

Switches the speed mode between fast and

slow.

3 : Break (Range: Rotate, Stop)

Stops speaker rotation.

4 : Fall Accel (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is

switched from fast to slow.

5 : Rise Accel (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts acceleration when the speed mode is

switched from slow to fast.

6 : Slow Rate (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts speaker rotation speed of the slow

speed mode.

7 : Fast Rate (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts speaker rotation speed of the fast speed

mode.

13 : Enhancer

■

Function

Enhances the outlines of the low range and

high range of the input signal.

■

Parameters

0 : Low Frequency (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the low range enhancer frequency.

1 : Low Gain (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the low range enhancer gain.

2 : High Frequency (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the high range enhancer frequency.

3 : High Gain (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the high range enhancer gain.

14 : Ring Modulator

■

Function

This is a ring modulator (AM modulator) that

makes it possible to modulate the frequency

of internal oscillator (OSC) in accordance with

an internal LFO.

■

Parameters

0 : OSC Frequency (Range: 0 to 127)

Sets the reference frequency of the internal

OSC.

1 : LFO Rate (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the rate of the LFO.

2 : LFO Depth (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the depth of the LFO.

3 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

4 : Dry Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the original sound.

15 : Lo-Fi

■

Function

This is an effector that reproduces a retro-type

Lo-Fi sound using Noise Generator 1 (phono-

graph record player type scratch noise genera-

tor) and Noise Generator 2 (FM radio type

white noise and pink noise continuous noise

generator), and by noise modulation (ampli-

tude modulation = AM) and distortion of fre-

quency characteristics.

■

Parameters

0 : Noise Level 1 (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of Noise Generator 1.

1 : Noise Density 1 (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the noise density of Noise Generator

2 : Noise Level 2 (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of Noise Generator 2.

3 : Noise Density 2 (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the noise density of Noise Generator

4 : Tone (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the tone.

5 : Resonance (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the resonance of the sound.

Appendix

735A-E-135A

WK3000_e_A-19-31.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM21

A-22

■

Parameters

0 : Rate1 (Fast LFO Rate) (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the rate of LFO1.

1 : Depth1 (Fast LFO Depth) (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the depth of LFO1.

2 : Rate2 (Slow LFO Rate) (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the rate of LFO2.

3 : Depth2 (Slow LFO Depth) (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the depth of LFO2.

4 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

19 : Tri 2-Phase Chorus

■

Function

This is stereo chorus in accordance with trian-

gular wave LFO.

■

Parameters

0 : LFO Rate (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the rate of the LFO.

1 : LFO Depth (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the depth of the LFO.

2 : Feedback(Range: -64 to 0 to +63)

Adjusts the feedback of the sound.

3 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

20 : Stereo Delay 1

■

Function

This is delay of stereo input and output.

■

Parameters

0 : Delay Time (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time.

1 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

2 : Feedback (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the repeat of the delay.

3 : High Damp (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts damping of the high-range delay

sound.

The smaller the value, the greater the damp-

ing of high-range delay sound.

4 : Ratio L (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time of the left channel.

Proportional to the value set for Delay Time.

5 : Ratio R (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time of the right channel.

Proportional to the value set for Delay Time.

21 : Stereo Delay 2

■

Function

This is cross feedback delay of stereo input and

output.

■

Parameters

0 : Delay Time (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time.

1 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

2 : Feedback (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the repeat of the delay.

3 : High Damp (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts damping of the high-range delay

sound.

The smaller the value, the greater the damp-

ing of high-range delay sound.

4 : Ratio L (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time of the left channel.

Proportional to the value set for Delay Time.

5 : Ratio R (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time of the right channel.

Proportional to the value set for Delay Time.

22 : 3-Tap Delay

■

Function

This is left/center/right 3-tap delay.

6 : Bass(Range: -64 to 0 to +63)

Adjusts the volume of low sounds.

7 : Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the output level.

16 : 1-Phase Chorus

■

Function

This is monaural chorus in accordance with a

sine wave LFO.

■

Parameters

0 : LFO Rate (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the rate of the LFO.

1 : LFO Depth (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the depth of the LFO.

2 : Feedback (Range: -64 to 0 to +63)

Adjusts the feedback of the sound.

3 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

17 : Sin 2-Phase Chorus

■

Function

This is stereo chorus in accordance with a sine

wave LFO.

■

Parameters

0 : LFO Rate (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the rate of the LFO.

1 : LFO Depth (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the depth of the LFO.

2 : Feedback (Range: -64 to 0 to +63)

Adjusts the feedback of the sound.

3 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

18 : 3-Phase Chorus

■

Function

This is 3-phase chorus in accordance with two

LFOs of with different sine wave rates.

Appendix

735A-E-136A

WK3000_e_A-19-31.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM22

A-23

■

Parameters

0 : Delay Time (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time.

1 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

2 : Feedback (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the repeat of the delay.

3 : High Damp (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts damping of the high-range delay

sound.

The smaller the value, the greater the damp-

ing of high-range delay sound.

4 : Ratio L (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time of the left channel.

Proportional to the value set for Delay Time.

5 : Ratio C (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time of the center channel.

Proportional to the value set for Delay Time.

6 : Ratio R (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time of the right channel.

Proportional to the value set for Delay Time.

23 : Gate Reverb

■

Function

This is a fader that creates artificial reverb that

sounds like it is being cut with a gate.

■

Parameters

0 : LPF (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the low-pass

filter.

A smaller value cuts the high range.

1 : HPF (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the high-pass

filter.

A larger value cuts the low range.

2 : Feedback (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the repeat of the reverb.

3 : High Damp (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts damping of the high-range delay

sound.

The smaller the value, the greater the damp-

ing of high-range delay sound.

4 : Diffusion (Range: 0 to 127)

Provides fine adjustment of the reverb.

5 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

6 : Dry Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the original sound.

24 : Reverse Gate Reverb

■

Function

This is gate reverb with a reverse rotation ef-

fect.

■

Parameters

0 : LPF (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the low-pass

filter.

A smaller value cuts the high range.

1 : HPF (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the cutoff frequency of the high-pass

filter.

A larger value cuts the low range.

2 : Feedback (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the repeat of the reverb.

3 : High Damp (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts damping of the high-range reverb

sound.

The smaller the value, the greater the damp-

ing of high-range reverb sound.

4 : Diffusion (Range: 0 to 127)

Provides fine adjustment of the reverb.

5 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

6 : Dry Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the original sound.

25 : Reflection

■

Function

This is an effector that extracts the first reflected

sound from a reverb sound.

■

Parameters

0 : Type (Range: 0 to 7)

Selects from among the eight available reflec-

tion patterns.

1 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

2 : Feedback (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the repeat of the reflected sound.

3 : Tone (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the tone of the reflected sound.

26 : Flanger

■

Function

This is a flanger in accordance with a sine wave

LFO.

■

Parameters

0 : LFO Rate (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the rate of the LFO.

1 : LFO Depth (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the depth of the LFO.

2 : Feedback (Range: -64 to 0 to +63)

Adjusts the feedback of the sound.

3 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

27 : Reverb

■

Function

This is an effector that preserves the breadth

of a sound by adding a reverb sound.

■

Parameters

0 : Tone (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the tone of the reverb sound.

Appendix

735A-E-137A

WK3000_e_A-19-31.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM23

A-24

1 : Time (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the reverb time.

2 : High Damp (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts damping of the high-range reverb

sound.

The smaller the value, the greater the damp-

ing of high-range reverb sound.

3 : ER Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the initial reflection.

4 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

28 : 2-Tap Delay

■

Function

This is left/right 2-tap delay.

■

Parameters

0 : Delay Time (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time.

1 : Wet Level (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the level of the effect sound.

2 : Feedback (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the repeat of the delay.

3 : High Damp (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts damping of the high-range delay

sound.

The smaller the value, the greater the damp-

ing of high-range delay sound.

4 : Ratio L (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time of the left channel.

Proportional to the value set for Delay Time.

5 : Ratio R (Range: 0 to 127)

Adjusts the delay time of the right channel.

Proportional to the value set for Delay Time.

★The following “Multi” algorithms are used in com-

bination with the algorithms described above. Pa-

rameters are shared by both types of algorithms.

M00 : Multi00 (Sin 2-Phase Chorus – 2-Tap

Delay)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Sin 2-

Phase Chorus - 2-Tap Delay.

■

Parameters

0 : Chorus LFO Rate

1 : Chorus LFO Depth

2 : Chorus Feedback

3 : Chorus Wet Level

4 : Delay Time

5 : Delay Wet Level

6 : Delay Feedback

7 : Delay High Damp

M01 : Multi01 (3-Phase Chorus – 3-Tap De-

lay)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to 3-Phase

Chorus - 3-Tap Delay.

■

Parameters

0 : Chorus Rate 1

1 : Chorus Depth 1

2 : Chorus Rate 2

3 : Chorus Depth 2

4 : Chorus Wet Level

5 : Delay Time

6 : Delay Wet Level

7 : Delay Feedback

M02 : Multi02 (Phaser – 3-Phase Chorus)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Phaser

- 3-Phase Chorus.

■

Parameters

0 : Phaser Resonance

1 : Phaser Manual

2 : Phaser Rate

3 : Phaser Depth

4 : Chorus Rate 1

5 : Chorus Depth 1

6 : Chorus Rate 2

7 : Chorus Depth 2

M03 : Multi03 (Flanger – 2-Tap Delay)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Flanger

- 2-Tap Delay.

■

Parameters

0 : Flanger LFO Rate

1 : Flanger LFO Depth

2 : Flanger Feedback

3 : Flanger Wet Level

4 : Delay Time

5 : Delay Wet Level

6 : Delay Feedback

7 : Delay High Damp

M04 : Multi04 (Stereo Phaser – Stereo Delay

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Stereo

Phaser - Stereo Delay 1.

■

Parameters

0 : Phaser Resonance

1 : Phaser Manual

2 : Phaser Rate

3 : Phaser Depth

4 : Phaser Wet Level

5 : Delay Time

Appendix

735A-E-138B

WK3000_e_A-19-31.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM24

A-25

6 : Delay Wet Level

7 : Delay Feedback

M05 : Multi05 (Enhancer – 1-Phase Chorus)

■

Function

This is a multi effector related to Enhancer - 1-

Phase Chorus.

■

Parameters

0 : Enhancer Low Frequency

1 : Enhancer Low Gain

2 : Enhancer High Frequency

3 : Enhancer High Gain

4 : Chorus LFO Rate

5 : Chorus LFO Depth

6 : Chorus Feedback

7 : Chorus Wet Level

M06 : Multi06 (Enhancer – 2-Tap Delay)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to En-

hancer - 2-Tap Delay.

■

Parameters

0 : Enhancer Low Frequency

1 : Enhancer Low Gain

2 : Enhancer High Frequency

3 : Enhancer High Gain

4 : Delay Time

5 : Delay Wet Level

6 : Delay Feedback

7 : Delay High Damp

M07 : Multi07 (Enhancer – Flanger)

■

Function

This is a multi effector related to Enhancer -

Flanger.

■

Parameters

0 : Enhancer Low Frequency

1 : Enhancer Low Gain

2 : Enhancer High Frequency

3 : Enhancer High Gain

4 : Flanger LFO Rate

5 : Flanger LFO Depth

6 : Flanger Feedback

7 : Flanger Wet Level

M08: Multi08 (Sin 2-Phase Chorus – Flanger)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Sin 2-

Phase Chorus - Flanger.

■

Parameters

0 : Chorus LFO Rate

1 : Chorus LFO Depth

2 : Chorus Feedback

3 : Chorus Wet Level

4 : Flanger LFO Rate

5 : Flanger LFO Depth

6 : Flanger Feedback

7 : Flanger Wet Level

M09 : Multi09

(Sin 2-Phase Chorus – Tremolo)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Sin 2-

Phase Chorus - Tremolo.

■

Parameters

0 : Chorus LFO Rate

1 : Chorus LFO Depth

2 : Chorus Feedback

3 : Chorus Wet Level

4 : Tremolo Rate

5 : Tremolo Depth

M10 : Multi10 (Stereo Phaser – Auto Pan)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Stereo

Phaser - Auto Pan.

■

Parameters

0 : Phaser Resonance

1 : Phaser Manual

2 : Phaser Rate

3 : Phaser Depth

4 : Phaser Wet Level

5 : Auto Pan Rate

6 : Auto Pan Depth

M11 : Multi11 (Compressor – Lo-Fi)

■

Function

This is a multi effector related to Compressor -

Lo-Fi.

■

Parameters

0 : Compressor Depth

1 : Compressor Attack

2 : Compressor Level

3 : Lo-Fi Noise 1

4 : Lo-Fi Noise 2

5 : Lo-Fi Tone

6 : Lo-Fi Resonance

7 : Lo-Fi Bass

M12 : Multi12 (Ring Modulator – Sin 2-Phase

Chorus - 2-Tap Delay)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Ring

Modulator - Sin 2-Phase Chorus.

■

Parameters

0 : Ring OSC Frequency

1 : Ring LFO Rate

2 : Ring LFO Depth

Appendix

735A-E-139A

WK3000_e_A-19-31.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM25

A-26

3 : Ring Wet Level

4 : Ring Dry Level

5 : Chorus LFO Depth

6 : Delay Time

7 : Delay Wet Level

M13 : Multi13 (Ring Modulator – Distortion)

■

Function

This is a multi effector related to Ring Modu-

lator - Distortion.

■

Parameters

0 : Ring OSC Frequency

1 : Ring LFO Rate

2 : Ring LFO Depth

3 : Ring Wet Level

4 : Ring Dry Level

5 : Distortion Gain

6 : Distortion Tone

7 : Distortion Level

M14 : Multi14 (Lo-Fi – Reflection)

■

Function

This is a multi effector related to Lo-Fi - Re-

flection.

■

Parameters

0 : Lo-Fi Noise1

1 : Lo-Fi Noise2

2 : Lo-Fi Tone

3 : Lo-Fi Resonance

4 : Reflection Type

5 : Reflection Wet Level

6 : Reflection Feedback

7 : Reflection Tone

M15 : Multi15 (Distortion – Lo-Fi)

■

Function

This is a multi effector related to Distortion -

Lo-Fi.

■

Parameters

0 : Distortion Gain

1 : Distortion Low

2 : Distortion High

3 : Distortion Level

4 : Lo-Fi Noise1

5 : Lo-Fi Noise2

6 : Lo-Fi Tone

7 : Lo-Fi Resonance

M16 : Multi16 (Drive Rotary – Reflection)

■

Function

This is a multi effector related to Drive Rotary

- Reflection.

■

Parameters

0 : Drive Rotary Gain

1 : Drive Rotary Level

2 : Drive Rotary Speed

3 : Drive Rotary Slow Rate

4 : Drive Rotary Fast Rate

5 : Reflection Wet Level

6 : Reflection Feedback

7 : Reflection Tone

M17 : Multi17 (Rotary – Reflection)

■

Function

This is a multi effector related to Rotary - Re-

flection.

■

Parameters

0 : Rotary Speed

1 : Rotary Break

2 : Rotary Slow Rate

3 : Rotary Fast Rate

4 : Reflection Wet Level

5 : Reflection Feedback

6 : Reflection Tone

M18 : Multi18 (Compressor – Enhancer - 2-

Tap Delay)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Com-

pressor - Enhancer - 2-Tap Delay.

■

Parameters

0 : Compressor Depth

1 : Compressor Attack

2 : Compressor Level

3 : Enhancer Low Gain

4 : Enhancer High Gain

5 : Delay Time

6 : Delay Wet Level

7 : Delay Feedback

M19 : Multi19 (Compressor – Stereo Delay

■

Function

This is a multi effector related to Compressor -

Stereo Delay 1.

■

Parameters

0 : Compressor Depth

1 : Compressor Attack

2 : Compressor Release

3 : Compressor Level

4 : Delay Time

5 : Delay Wet Level

6 : Delay Feedback

7 : Delay High Damp

Appendix

735A-E-140A

WK3000_e_A-19-31.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM26

A-27

M20 : Multi20 (Phaser – 1-Phase Chorus –

Auto Pan)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Phaser

- 1-Phase Chorus - Auto Pan.

■

Parameters

0 : Phaser Resonance

1 : Phaser Manual

2 : Phaser Rate

3 : Phaser Depth

4 : Chorus LFO Rate

5 : Chorus LFO Depth

6 : Auto Pan Rate

7 : Auto Pan Depth

M21 : Multi21 (Auto Wah – Tri 2-Phase Cho-

rus – 2-Tap Delay)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Auto

Wah - Tri 2-Phase Chorus - 2-Tap Delay.

■

Parameters

0 : Wah Resonance

1 : Wah Manual

2 : Wah Depth

3 : Chorus LFO Rate

4 : Chorus LFO Depth

5 : Delay Time

6 : Delay Wet Level

7 : Delay Feedback

M22 : Multi22 (LFO Wah – Tri 2-Phase Cho-

rus – 2-Tap Delay)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to LFO

Wah - Tri 2-Phase Chorus - 2-Tap Delay.

■

Parameters

0 : Wah Resonance

1 : Wah Manual

2 : Wah LFO Rate

3 : Wah LFO Depth

4 : Chorus LFO Depth

5 : Delay Time

6 : Delay Wet Level

7 : Delay Feedback

M23 : Multi23 (Compressor – Sin 2-Phase

Chorus – Reflection)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Com-

pressor - Sin 2-Phase Chorus - Reflection.

■

Parameters

0 : Compressor Depth

1 : Compressor Attack

2 : Compressor Level

3 : Chorus LFO Rate

4 : Chorus LFO Depth

5 : Reflection Wet Level

6 : Reflection Feedback

7 : Reflection Tone

M24 : Multi24 (Distortion – 1-Phase Chorus

– 2-Tap Delay)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Distor-

tion - 1-Phase Chorus - 2-Tap Delay.

■

Parameters

0 : Distortion Gain

1 : Distortion Low

2 : Distortion High

3 : Distortion Level

4 : Chorus LFO Depth

5 : Delay Time

6 : Delay Wet Level

7 : Delay Feedback

M25 : Multi25 (Compressor – Distortion – 2-

Tap Delay)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Com-

pressor - Distortion - 2-Tap Delay.

■

Parameters

0 : Compressor Depth

1 : Distortion Gain

2 : Distortion Low

3 : Distortion High

4 : Distortion Level

5 : Delay Time

6 : Delay Wet Level

7 : Delay Feedback

M26 : Multi26 (Auto Wah – Distortion – 2-Tap

Delay)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Auto

Wah - Distortion - 2-Tap Delay.

■

Parameters

0 : Wah Manual

1 : Wah Depth

2 : Distortion Gain

3 : Distortion Tone

4 : Distortion Level

5 : Delay Time

6 : Delay Wet Level

7 : Delay Feedback

Appendix

735A-E-141A

WK3000_e_A-19-31.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM27

A-28

M27 : Multi27 (LFO Wah – Distortion – 2-Tap

Delay)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to LFO

Wah - Distortion - 2-Tap Delay.

■

Parameters

0 : Wah Manual

1 : Wah LFO Rate

2 : Wah LFO Depth

3 : Distortion Gain

4 : Distortion Level

5 : Delay Time

6 : Delay Wet Level

7 : Delay Feedback

M28 : Multi28 (Distortion – 3-Tap Delay)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Distor-

tion - 3-Tap Delay.

■

Parameters

0 : Distortion Gain

1 : Distortion Low

2 : Distortion High

3 : Distortion Level

4 : Delay Time

5 : Delay Wet Level

6 : Delay Feedback

7 : Delay High Damp

M29 : Multi29 (Distortion – Phaser)

■

Function

This is a multi effector related to Distortion -

Phaser.

■

Parameters

0 : Distortion Gain

1 : Distortion Low

2 : Distortion High

3 : Distortion Level

4 : Phaser Resonance

5 : Phaser Manual

6 : Phaser Rate

7 : Phaser Depth

M30 : Multi30 (Distortion – Sin 2-Phase Cho-

rus)

■

Function

This is a multi effector that is related to Distor-

tion - Sin 2-Phase Chorus.

■

Parameters

0 : Distortion Gain

1 : Distortion Low

2 : Distortion High

3 : Distortion Level

4 : Chorus LFO Rate

5 : Chorus LFO Depth

6 : Chorus Feedback

7 : Chorus Wet Level

M31 : Multi31 (Distortion – Flanger)

■

Function

This is a multi effector related to Distortion -

Flanger.

■

Parameters

0 : Distortion Gain

1 : Distortion Low

2 : Distortion High

3 : Distortion Level

4 : Flanger LFO Rate

5 : Flanger LFO Depth

6 : Flanger Feedback

7 : Flanger Wet Level

Appendix

735A-E-142A

WK3000_e_A-19-31.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM28



735A-E-143A

WK3000_e_A-19-31.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM29



735A-E-144A

WK3000_e_A-19-31.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM30



735A-E-145A

WK3000_e_A-19-31.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM31

735A-E-146A

Models WK-3500/WK-3000

MIDI Implementation Chart

Version: 1.0

Function .. Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic Default

Channel Changed

Default

Mode Messages

Altered

Note

Number: True voice

Velocity Note ON

Note OFF

After Key's

Touch Ch's

Pitch Bender

0,32

6,38

Control 67

Change 71

1-16

Mode 3

❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊

0-127

❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊

9nH v = 1-127

9nH v = 0

Depends on tone.

Bank select

Modulation

Data entry

Volume

Pan

Expression

DSP Parameter0

DSP Parameter1

DSP Parameter2

DSP Parameter3

Hold1

Sostenuto

Soft pedal

Resonance

Release Time

Attack Time

Brightness

1-16

Mode 3

❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊

0-127

0-127*

9nH v = 1-127

WK3000_e_MIDI Chart.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM2

735A-E-147A

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO

: Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

: No

98, 99

100, 101

120

Program

Change :True #

System Exclusive

System : Song Pos

Common : Song Sel

: Tune

System : Clock

Real Time : Commands

Aux : Local ON/OFF

: All notes OFF

Messages : Active Sense

: Reset

Remarks

0-127

❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊

Release Time

Attack Time

Brightness

Vibrato rate

Vibrato depth

Vibrato delay

DSP Parameter4

DSP Parameter5

DSP Parameter6

DSP Parameter7

Reverb send

Chorus send

NRPN LSB, MSB

RPN LSB, MSB

All sound off

Reset all controller

0-127

❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊❊

Cannot be sent by keyboard play or control panel operations on this instrument, but sent by Auto Accompaniment or

Song Memory functions.

Selected in accordance with sustain pedal setting.

WK3000_e_MIDI Chart.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM3

WK3000/3500-E-1

This recycle mark indicates that the packaging conforms to

the environmental protection legislation in Germany.

MA0306-B Printed in China

CASIO COMPUTER CO.,LTD.

6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome

Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan

WK3000_e_cover.p65 03.6.11, 5:19 PM2

Casio WK3000_3100_3500 WK3000 3100 3500 NL

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation